ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008"

Transcription

1 What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 by Delcam plc Issue: 259 Released: 20/03/2008

2 Disclaimer Delcam plc has no control over the use made of the software described in this manual and cannot accept responsibility for any loss or damage howsoever caused as a result of using the software. Users are advised that all the results from the software should be checked by a competent person, in accordance with good quality control procedures. Information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment by Delcam plc. The software described in this manual is furnished under licence agreement and may be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such licence. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose without the express permission of Delcam plc. Copyright Delcam plc. All rights reserved. Acknowledgements This documentation references a number of registered trademarks and these are the property of their respective owners. For example, Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Patents The functionality of preparing a 3D relief of the side profile of a human face direct from a photograph in ArtCAM Pro is subject to a patent. Patent No: GB "Photo to 3D" The functionality of the 3D layers used to design and machine an article in ArtCAM Pro are subject to a patent application. Patent application: GB "3D Layers"

3 Contents Overview 1 New ArtCAM Workflow 7 Working With Projects...7 Enhanced Project Creation...9 Opening a Project...10 Using the Project Tree...15 Saving a Project...30 Closing a Project...32 Working With Models...33 Creating a New Model...33 Opening an Existing Model...58 Creating a Duplicate Model...66 Saving a Model...66 Closing a Model...67 Importing a Model...70 Exporting a Model...71 Deleting a Model...72 Working With Assemblies...73 Creating an Empty Assembly...73 Creating a Component from an Empty Assembly...74 Copying and Pasting an Assembly...76 Block Copying an Assembly...77 Rotate Copying an Assembly...79 Creating a Relief from an Assembly...81 Creating a Rotary Relief from an Assembly...82 Mirroring an Assembly...84 Importing an Assembly...85 Exporting an Assembly...86 Deleting an Assembly...87 Viewing the Attributes of an Assembly...88 Adjusting the Material Settings...89 Adding a Gem to an Assembly...91 Creating an Assembly Silhouette...92 What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Contents i

4 Creating a Movie...93 Using the Multi-Sided Machining Wizard...97 Working With Replica Meshes Adding a Replica Mesh to a Project Editing an Associated Model Creating a Relief from the Project Tree Creating a Rotary Relief from a Replica Mesh Importing a Replica Mesh Importing a Replica Mesh from the Component Library Exporting a Replica Mesh Smoothing a Replica Mesh Reversing a Replica Mesh Deleting a Replica Mesh Working with Gems Adding a Gem to an Assembly Editing a Gem's Size and Colour Exporting a Gem Importing a Gem Deleting a Gem ii Contents What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

5 Using the Nudge Tool Using the Scale Tool Modified Interface 134 Enhanced Project Tree Modified Tab Layout Revised File Menu Options Enhanced Bitmap Import 143 Enhanced 3D Model Import 144 Enhanced Bitmap To Vector Tool 150 Modified Primary and Secondary Colours 152 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools 153 Updated Extrude Tool Updated Spin Tool Updated Turn Tool Enhanced Shape Editor 170 New Magic Wand Tool 175 Enhanced Mesh Creator 177 Enhanced Two-Rail Ring Sweep Tool 184 New Vector Boundary Tool 188 Enhanced Interactive Sculpting 191 Enhanced Lights and Material Settings 192 New Relief Layer Thumbnails 193 What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Contents iii

6 New Slice Relief Tool 194 Enhanced Machine Relief Toolpath 196 Enhanced Feature Machining Toolpath 203 Enhanced Z Level Roughing Toolpath 210 Enhanced Smart Engraving Toolpath 217 New Drill Bank Toolpath 223 Enhanced Drilling Toolpath 232 Enhanced Profiling Toolpath 238 New 2D Machining Wizard Tool 239 New MillWizard Machining Tool 254 Enhanced Toolpath Batch Calculation 267 Enhanced Toolpath Transform 275 Enhanced Toolpath Simulation 281 New Toolpath Simulation To Relief Layer Tool 283 Enhanced ArtCAM Options Page 284 Enhanced Twiddle Tool 286 iv Contents What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

7 Overview ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 offers all the original features of ArtCAM JewelSmith 9.1 and the following new features: New ArtCAM Workflow (on page 7). The way in which projects are created and stored has changed, and the tools unique to ArtCAM JewelSmith have either been repositioned or removed. Modified Interface (on page 134). The Project Tree on the Project tab has changed. Each of the new items in the Project Tree has its own associated context-menu. Almost all of the items familiar to the Project Tree in previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith either have an entirely new context-menu or additional options. It is now far easier to work directly from the Project Tree. As a result of the new workflow and features in ArtCAM JewelSmith, there have also been changes to the Main Menu bar layout. Enhanced Bitmap Import (on page 143). You can now create a new model from a broader range of bitmap image files, or import any of them into an open ArtCAM model as a new bitmap layer. Enhanced 3D Model Import. (on page 144) You can now import a broad range of triangle and surface models into an open ArtCAM model as a relief or as a replica mesh in the Project Tree. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Overview 1

8 Enhanced Bitmap To Vector Tool (on page 150). In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, the Vectors From Bitmap dialog box allowed you to create vector artwork around the outline of all areas of an image on a bitmap layer drawn in the current Primary Colour, together with those colours from the Colour Palette linked to the Primary Colour. All of the settings associated with the Vectors From Bitmap dialog box have now been consolidated onto a single page of settings displayed in the Assistant window. Moreover, you can now calculate a vector centreline from all areas of the bitmap layer in the current Primary Colour, together with those colours that are linked to the Primary Colour. This is particularly useful for calculating a centreline from bitmap images of text. Modified Primary and Secondary Colours (on page 152). In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, the default Primary Colour in the Colour Palette is white and the default Secondary Colour is black. The default Primary Colour is now black and the default Secondary Colour is white. Enhanced Swept Profile Tools (on page 153). All of the settings previously found in each of the steps associated with the Extrude, Spin and Turn Wizards have each been consolidated onto a single page of settings displayed in the Assistant window. Enhanced Shape Editor (on page 170). In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, you could only create three-dimensional shapes using the Shape Editor tool and the bitmap image shown in the 2D View window. You can now project an image hosted on a bitmap layer onto the composite relief shown in the 3D View window and then use the Shape Editor tool to create threedimensional shapes on a selected relief layer directly from there. New Magic Wand Tool (on page 175). You can now create vector boundaries around adjacent consistently coloured areas of a bitmap layer or contiguous areas of the composite relief at a consistent height. Enhanced Mesh Creator (on page 177). You now have greater control over how the back face is created in the triangle mesh, if at all. You can also define the angle of the triangles in the resulting triangle mesh, thus smoothing its overall appearance. You can now also add the triangle mesh to the project directly from the Mesh Creator page. This follows the removal of the Add To Master button previously found in the General Tools area of the also redundant JewelSmith tab. 2 Overview What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

9 Enhanced Two-Rail Ring Sweep Tool (on page 184). You can now control the direction of the vectors that you have selected as the drive rails when creating a two-rail swept ring shape. New Vector Boundary Tool (on page 188). You can now create vector boundaries from the composite relief or a selected relief layer. The resulting vector artwork can be used as an efficient machining boundary in several toolpaths, a boundary for envelope distortion, smoothing, applying texture or scaling, and for cleaningup scanned data. Enhanced Interactive Sculpting (on page 191). You can now limit the reach of any of the tools available when sculpting the composite relief. This is particularly useful for engraving work which demands a strict Z range. Enhanced Lights and Material Settings (on page 192). The new Modelling Default and Simulation Default shading options replace the Default option available in previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith. The settings associated with the Default option available in previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith are now named Old Default. You can store custom settings as the Modelling Default and the Simulation Default so that these are used when viewing the composite relief and simulated toolpaths in the 3D View window. New Relief Layer Thumbnails (on page 193). In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, it was not possible to determine the content on a specific relief layer unless it was actually visible in the 3D View window. Each relief layer now has its own thumbnail image, allowing you to check its content irrespective of whether it is currently visible in the 3D View window or not. New Slice Relief Tool (on page 194). The new Slice Relief tool allows you to divide the composite relief or the content on a single relief layer into slices. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Overview 3

10 Enhanced Machine Relief Toolpath (on page 196). You can now machine as closely as possible to the composite relief above or below its base height using a chosen tool. ArtCAM JewelSmith calculates a boundary vector using the tool geometry. You can also use a 3D Offset machining strategy to produce a toolpath where the stepover is consistent when machining the composite relief, irrespective of direction. This technique is best suited to machining areas which require a constant stepover and works well on steep and near vertical surfaces. Alternatively, you can use a 3D Offset Spiral machining strategy to produce a spiral toolpath where the stepover is consistent when machining the composite relief, irrespective of direction. This minimises the number of lifts of the tool and maximises cutting time while maintaining more constant load conditions and deflections on the tool. Enhanced Feature Machining Toolpath (on page 203). All of the settings originally found on the Create Raised Feature, Create Recessed Feature and Create Centreline Feature pages have now been consolidated on the Feature Machining page. When creating a raised or recessed feature using and angled Feature Tool, you can now extend the sharpening of the external corners to the bottom of the feature. Enhanced Z Level Roughing Toolpath (on page 210). You can now machine as closely as possible to the composite relief above or below its base height using a chosen tool. ArtCAM JewelSmith calculates a boundary vector using the tool geometry. You can also use the Z dimensions of the composite relief to control the position of the first and last Z slices. Enhanced Smart Engraving Toolpath (on page 217). The overall calculation time for the Smart Engraving toolpath is noticeably faster and its resulting moves are far cleaner. New Drill Bank Toolpath (on page 223). The new Drill Bank toolpath allows you to drill at the centre of each vector in a selection of artwork, typically circular. You can configure any type of Drill Bank pattern such as L, + or T shapes containing any number of drills to match the Drill Bank on your machine. ArtCAM JewelSmith considers the selected geometry and applies a Drill Bank toolpath for all X and Y axis holes containing a 32 mm (1.26") pitch (standard pitch value for most machines). 4 Overview What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

11 Enhanced Drilling Toolpath (on page 232). When creating drill holes, you can now define the height above the material block at which you want your cutting tool to make the transition from the rapid rate to the plunge rate, which prevents the tool colliding with uneven material surfaces during rapid moves. Enhanced Profiling Toolpath (on page 238). When creating a Profiling toolpath including lead moves you can now produce a single ramp of continuous motion from the top of the material to the full depth of cut. This prevents the tip of the tool from going straight down into the material surface. Enhanced Toolpath Batch Calculation (on page 267). The new Optimize Feed Rates option allows machining times to be reduced by up to 50% and so gives increased productivity and faster delivery in a wide range of manufacturing operations. Other benefits include reduced wear on cutting tools and CNC machines, improved surface finish, and less need for the operator to supervise machining. Enhanced Toolpath Transform (on page 275). You can now rotate a toolpath around a defined rotation centre, move a toolpath to an absolute position, toggle the display of all toolpath moves behind and below the surface of the composite relief, as seen in the 3D View window, project a toolpath directly onto the surface of the composite relief and move and rotate a 2D toolpath using its toolpath preview shown in the 2D View window. Enhanced Toolpath Simulation (on page 281). You can now define the resolution of the toolpath simulation or render any toolpath simulation shown in the 3D View window from a choice of twenty-two shading sets available from the Shading list box in the Toolpath Simulation area of the Toolpaths Home page. New Toolpath Simulation To Relief Layer Tool (on page 283). You can now create a new relief layer from a toolpath simulation shown in the 3D View window. Enhanced ArtCAM Options Page (on page 284). You can now control which type of bridges, or tabs, are created by default in ArtCAM JewelSmith. Three-dimensional bridges possess a triangular cross-section and do not have any associated retract or plunge moves. You can also change the colour associated with a toolpath simulation shown in the 2D View window as a solid or the colour associated with simulated toolpaths shown in the 3D View window, and define the resolution of the relief in the ArtCAM model resulting from an assembly or replica mesh. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Overview 5

12 Enhanced Twiddle Tool (on page 286). Continuing advances in 3D graphics hardware are now utilised by ArtCAM JewelSmith to provide appreciably faster manipulation of the content shown in the 3D View window. Only new features available in ArtCAM JewelSmith are documented here. 6 Overview What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

13 New ArtCAM Workflow In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith you would work with a single ArtCAM model file (*.art) in each ArtCAM session. In ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008, you can work with several ArtCAM model files in a single session as part of an ArtCAM project. Each project file (*.3dp) hosts as many models as you like, as well as assemblies, replica meshes and gems. You can still create models independently in the same way as in previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, and then import them into a project. Working With Projects In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, an ArtCAM project essentially comprised a conventional Windows folder, referred to as the Project Folder. Within this Project Folder you would find the 3D Master Model file (*.3dp), and separate folders for each of the components associated with the project. Within each of these folders you would find the ArtCAM model file (*.art) used when creating the component. In ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 there is no longer a Project Folder, the *.3dp file suffix is now associated with the ArtCAM Project file, and the 3D Master Model is equivalent to the new Root Assembly in the Project Tree. The ArtCAM Project file (*.3dp) itself hosts any number of ArtCAM models, assemblies, triangle mesh replicas and gem settings. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 7

14 The ArtCAM model contains vector and bitmap artwork, reliefs and toolpaths. An assembly contains triangle mesh replicas of ArtCAM models, shading and lighting information or further assemblies. Providing that a replica mesh has been created from an ArtCAM model stored as part of the same project, it also hosts a link to the ArtCAM model file from which it originates. A single assembly hosts any number of replica meshes and/or gems or further assemblies along with their own associated replica meshes and gems. You can create a relief layer in an open ArtCAM model directly from a replica mesh, or an assembly providing that it has an associated replica mesh. Assemblies are useful for a number of reasons. Firstly they are very useful for visualization, as they allow you to view both the front and back surfaces of a piece simultaneously. In addition, they can be replicated, scaled, positioned and rotated. Although an assembly can be manipulated in three-dimensional space, you cannot edit the actual shape of the assembly itself. A model can be created: from the Models folder in the Project Tree. For details, see Creating a New Model (on page 33). by duplicating an existing model in the Project Tree. For details, see Creating a Duplicate Model (on page 66). by importing a previously saved model. For details, see Importing a Model (on page 70). by using a blank. For details, see Creating a New Model from a Blank (on page 49). by using a shank. For details, see Creating a New Model from a Shank (on page 55). An assembly can be created: from the Root Assembly in the Project Tree. For details, see Creating an Empty Assembly (on page 73). by copying and pasting an existing assembly in the Project Tree. For details, see Copying and Pasting an Item (on page 29). by importing an ArtCAM Assembly file. For details, see Importing an Assembly (on page 85). A replica mesh can be created: from the composite relief within an ArtCAM model. For details, see Adding a Replica Mesh to a Project (on page 109). 8 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

15 When a replica mesh is added to a project, it is associated with the assembly that is currently selected in the Project Tree. You can click and drag the replica mesh to adjust its position in the overall Project Tree structure. For details, see Moving an Item (on page 27). by copying and pasting an existing replica mesh in the Project Tree. For details, see Copying and Pasting an Item (on page 29). by importing a compatible triangle model; or by importing a compatible surface model. For details, see Importing a Replica Mesh (on page 117). A gem can be created: from the Root Assembly or an assembly in the Project Tree. For details, see Adding a Gem to an Assembly (on page 91). by copying and pasting an existing gem in the Project Tree. For details, see Copying and Pasting an Item (on page 29). by importing a gem originally saved as an ArtCAM Assembly File (*.3da). For details, see Importing a Gem (on page 127). Enhanced Project Creation In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, you would create a new project by clicking on the Create JewelSmith Project icon in the JewelSmith Projects area of the Assistant's Getting Started page, defining the name the project, the location on your computer in which the project folder is created, and whether or not the project was based on an imported 3D model. In ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 a new project is created by clicking on a single icon. Now that a single ArtCAM Project File (*.3dp) hosts as many ArtCAM models, assemblies, replica meshes and gems as you like, ArtCAM JewelSmith no longer needs to create a project folder on your computer. You now give a name to the project only when it is being saved. You can open any ArtCAM Project File (*.3dp) or ArtCAM Assembly File (*.3da) as a project, and import a broad range of 3D models into a project. To create a new ArtCAM Project: 1. Click on the Create New Project icon in the Projects area of the Assistant's Getting Started page. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 9

16 Alternatively, you can click on the File > New > Project option from the Main Menu bar. ArtCAM JewelSmith opens with only the Project tab visible in the left panel. This tab contains the Project Tree, which consists of three default items: The Project item This is represented by the icon and is the root of the Project Tree. It is named (Untitled) by default. You can give the project a name when it is saved for the first time. For details, see Saving a Project (on page 30). The Models folder item This is represented by the icon and hosts any number of ArtCAM models. For further details, see Working with Models (on page 33). The Root Assembly item This is represented by the icon and hosts any number of assemblies and their associated replica meshes. For further details, see Working with Assemblies (on page 73). You cannot delete any of these items from the Project Tree, or rename them. Opening a Project To open an existing ArtCAM project: 10 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

17 1. Click on the Open Existing Project icon in the Projects area of the Assistant's Getting Started page to display the Open dialog box: Alternatively, you can click on the File > Open... menu option from the Main Menu bar or press the Ctrl + O keys on your keyboard to display the Open dialog box. If you have Ring Projects from ArtCAM JewelSmith version 6 or earlier, then you can also open 3D Assembly files (*.3da) associated with the original project. You should be aware that older projects might not contain all of the data required to use some of the tools. Also a model will not be associated with a replica mesh in legacy projects. The Edit Model menu option will not work. For details, see Editing an Associated Model (on page 114). 2. Make sure that the ArtCAM File (*.art; *.3dp; *.3da; *.rlf) option is selected in the Files of Type list box. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 11

18 Only ArtCAM Project Files (*.3dp) and ArtCAM Assembly Files (*.3da) result in a project being opened on the Project tab. 3. Click on the Look in list box followed by the folder or directory on your computer in which the file that you want to open is stored. 4. Once you have found the file, click on its file name. Its name is displayed in the File name box. 5. Click on the Open button to open the file and display the Project page. The Project page hosts the Project Tree. The Root Assembly in the Project Tree is selected by default and a selection of tools that can be used in association with this are also displayed. The name given to the project is shown to the right of the control icon in the main title bar: The name of the 3D View is only included in the main title bar by default if the Maximise Views on Startup option is selected in the Miscellaneous area of the ArtCAM Options page. Opening Recent Projects You can quickly open any of the last four projects that you have been working on in ArtCAM JewelSmith. To open a recent project: 1. Beneath the Open Existing Project icon in the Projects area of the Assistant's Getting Started page, click on the name of the project that you want to open. You can also open recently saved projects by clicking on the File option in the Main Menu bar, followed by the name of the required project listed above the Exit option. A combination of up to four ArtCAM projects and models are listed at once. 12 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

19 If you position the mouse cursor over the icon beside any of the four projects listed in the Projects area of the Assistant's Getting Started page, its location on your computer is displayed. Opening Legacy Projects To update projects created in ArtCAM JewelSmith 9.1 to work within ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008: 1. Click on the Open Existing Project icon in the Projects area of the Assistant's Getting Started page to display the Open dialog box: 2. Make sure that ArtCAM Files (*.art; *.3dp; *.3da; *.rlf) option is selected in the Files of type list box. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 13

20 3. Click on the Look in list box and navigate to the original project folder on your computer. A project folder typically contains a 3D Master Model File (*.3DP) and additional sub-folders; each of which contain an ArtCAM Model File (*.art). 4. Click on the 3D Master Model File (*.3DP) within the project folder. Its name is displayed in the File name box. 5. Click on the Open button to close the dialog box, open the 3D Master Model File (*.3DP) and import each of the model files associated with the project. All assemblies associated with the 3D Master Model File (*.3dp) are shown beneath the Root Assembly in the Project Tree. Each of the assemblies, replica meshes and gems associated with the assemblies which are already shown can be displayed by clicking on the expand icon beside each assembly. Each of the models created as part of the original project can be displayed by clicking on the expand icon beside the Models folder in the Project Tree. The icon indicates that each model is currently closed. The project is named (Untitled) by default. A message box is displayed asking if you want save the converted project: 6. If you do not want to save the project at this time, click on the No button to close the message box. 14 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

21 If you want to save the project, click on the Yes button to close the message box and display the Save Project As... dialog box: 7. Click on the Save in list box, followed by the folder on your computer in which you want to save the converted project. 8. Type the name that you want to give to the project in the File name box. It is recommended that you use a name for the project different to that which was originally used for ease of reference and to preserve backwards compatibility. 9. Click on the Save button to save the project and close the Save Project dialog box. The resulting file is referred to as the ArtCAM Project File (*.3dp). The name given to the project replaces the (Untitled) label which was previously shown to the right of the control icon in the main title bar. Using the Project Tree The Project tab is the first of the three tabs located in the panel on the left of the ArtCAM JewelSmith interface. You can hide the panel which hosts the Project, Assistant and Toolpaths tabs by clicking on the Toggle Left Panel button on the 2D View toolbar. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 15

22 If you want to reposition the panel, click and hold the left mouse button on the area to the right of the Toolpaths tab, drag the panel to the desired position and then release the mouse button to dock the panel. A fourth Machining tab is displayed when the Multi-Sided Machining Wizard (see "Using the Multi-Sided Machining Wizard" on page 97) is used. When the MillWizard (see "New MillWizard Machining Tool" on page 254) tool is used all of the tabs are replaced by the MillWizard tab. The Project tab hosts a tree which maps the structure of both your ArtCAM projects and models. The overall layout of the Project tab depends on whether you are working with an ArtCAM project or an ArtCAM model independently. If you are working on an ArtCAM project: The icon denotes the root of the Project Tree. If the current project has been saved, the name given to the project is shown beside this icon. Click on the expand icon beside any item in the Project Tree to show the items associated with this aspect of your ArtCAM Project. Click on the collapse icon to hide them again. If you are working on an ArtCAM model independently: The icon denotes the root of the Project Tree. The name of the ArtCAM model is shown beside this icon. There can be several other items in the Project Tree, depending on what you are working on. There are up to five types of item associated with an open project in the Project Tree: The icon represents the Models folder, which is a default item within every project. 16 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

23 Right-click on the Models folder to display its contextmenu. You can use this to create a new model or import an existing model: The icon represents the Root Assembly, which is a default item within every project. Right-click on the Root Assembly to display its contextmenu. You can use this to toggle its visibility, create a new assembly, import, export, copy, paste, smooth, reverse and create a flat or rotary relief: The icon represents each of the ArtCAM models that are part of the project. There can be several of these items in the Project Tree. The icon changes to whenever the model is open in ArtCAM JewelSmith. Right-click on a closed model to display its context-menu. You can use this to edit, duplicate, export, delete and rename the model: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 17

24 Right-click on the open model to display its context-menu. You can use this to update the project, close, duplicate, export, create a triangle mesh from, rename, resize, reposition, mirror and rotate the model, adjust its resolution, lights and material settings and toggle the display of its associated notes: The icon represents each of the assemblies that are part of the project. There can be several of these items in the Project Tree. Right-click on an assembly to display its context-menu. You can use this to toggle its visibility, create a new assembly, import, export, cut, copy, paste, smooth, delete, rename and create a flat or rotary relief from the assembly: 18 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

25 The icon represents each of the replica meshes that are part of the project. There can be several of these items in the Project Tree. Right-click on an replica mesh to display its contextmenu. You can use this to toggle its visibility, edit an associated model, export, cut, copy, smooth, reverse, delete, rename and create a flat or rotary relief from the replica mesh: The icon represents each of the gems that are part of the project. There can be several of these items in the Project Tree. Right-click on a gem to display its context-menu. You can use this to toggle its visibility, export, cut, copy, reverse, delete and rename the gem: There are up to six types of item associated with an open model in the Project Tree: The icon represents the Views item, which is a default item within every open model. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 19

26 Right-click on the Views item to display its context-menu. You can use this to create a new 2D View window in the workspace area, display the snap grid in all 2D View windows, control the snapping behaviour in all 2D View windows and control how the design windows are arranged: The icon represents an individual 2D View window. There is a single default 2D View item within every model. Double-click on the icon associated with any 2D View to make it the active view window in the workspace area. Right-click on any of the 2D View windows in the Project Tree to display its context-menu. You can use this to control the appearance of rulers and guidelines in the view, calculate a relief using the shape attributes applied to the bitmap artwork shown in the view, and delete or rename the view: The icon represents the Toolpaths item, which is a default item within every open model. 20 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

27 Right-click on the Toolpaths item to display its contextmenu. You can use this to calculate, edit, delete, save or simulate a single toolpath or calculate a batch of toolpaths at once: The icon represents each of the toolpaths created as part of the open model. Double-click on any toolpath to display the toolpath settings in the Assistant window. You can then edit or calculate the toolpath. Right-click on any toolpath to display its context-menu. You can use this to edit, calculate, simulate, transform, delete or rename the toolpath: The icon represents each of the tools used in a calculated toolpath and its associated strategy. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 21

28 Right-click on any tool item to display its context-menu. You can use this to simulate, transform, save or delete the tool passes: The Examples of where a tool item reflects the strategy used include for spirals and for feature machining. icon represents a rotary relief created as part of the model. Right-click on the rotary relief item to display its contextmenu. You can use this to toggle its visibility, export or delete the rotary relief: The Project tab is divided into two areas by a splitter bar, as shown below: The area above the splitter bar hosts the Project Tree, whilst the area below hosts all context-sensitive tools and/or information associated with the item currently selected in the Project Tree. When an item in the Project Tree is selected, its name together with its associated icon is displayed in the splitter bar. When one of the context-sensitive tools displayed on the Project page are used, its name, and often the name of the item in the Project Tree on which the tool is being used, is displayed in the splitter bar. You can use the icons on the splitter bar as follows: Click on the icon to minimize the area below the splitter bar, thus hiding all context-sensitive tools and/or information associated with any item currently selected in the Project Tree. Click on the icon to maximize the area above the splitter bar, thus hiding the Project Tree. 22 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

29 Click on the icon to restore the splitter bar to its previous position in the Project tab. To reposition the splitter bar: 1. Click on the splitter bar and drag upwards or downwards. The splitter bar is greyed-out when it is being moved, as shown below: 2. Release the mouse button to set the splitter bar in your preferred position. When the Root Assembly is selected in the Project Tree, four sets of tools are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar: The buttons in the Positioning area allow you to reposition (see "Using the Nudge Tool" on page 128) and scale (see "Using the Scale Tool" on page 133). The buttons in the Tools area allow you to mirror (see "Mirroring an Assembly" on page 84), copy rotate (see "Rotate Copying an Assembly" on page 79), block copy (see "Block Copying an Assembly" on page 77), add gems (see "Adding a Gem to an Assembly" on page 91), machine the project (see "Using the Multi- Sided Machining Wizard" on page 97), create a movie (see "Creating a Movie" on page 93) and create an assembly silhouette (see "Creating an Assembly Silhouette" on page 92). What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 23

30 The Create Assembly Silhouette button when a model is open in the Project Tree. is only displayed The buttons in the Properties area allow you to view attributes (see "Viewing the Attributes of an Assembly" on page 88) and adjust material settings (see "Adjusting the Material Settings" on page 89). The button in the Libraries area allows you to import a component (see "Creating a Component from an Empty Assembly" on page 74) from the Component Library. When an assembly is selected in the Project Tree, four sets of tools are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar: When the Models folder is selected in the Project Tree, two sets of tools are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar: 24 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

31 The buttons in the New Blanks area allow you to create a new blank model (see "Creating a New Model from a Blank" on page 49). The buttons in the New Shanks area allow you to create a new shank model (see "Creating a New Model from a Shank" on page 55). When a replica mesh is selected in the Project Tree, one set of tools is displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar: When a gem is selected in the Project Tree, two sets of tools are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar: When an open model is selected in the Project Tree, its dimensions are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar along with any associated base height. When any other item is selected in the Project Tree, all of the buttons are hidden from view. Toggling the Display of an Item You can control which of the following items in the Project Tree are visible in the 3D View window: the Root Assembly an assembly a replica mesh a gem What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 25

32 a rotary relief To toggle the display of an item in the Project Tree: 1. Right-click on the item to display its context-menu, then click on the required option: If you want to display the item in the 3D View, click on the Show menu option. If you are showing the Root Assembly, its icon changes to. If you are showing an assembly, its icon changes to. If you are showing a replica mesh, its icon changes to. If you are showing a gem, its icon changes to. If you are showing a rotary relief, its icon changes to. If you want to hide the item in the 3D View, click on the Hide menu option. If you are hiding the Root Assembly, its icon changes to. If you are hiding an assembly, its icon changes to. If you are hiding a replica mesh, its icon changes to. If you are hiding a gem, its icon changes to. If you are hiding a rotary relief, its icon changes to. When a model is open, you can toggle the visibility of the Root Assembly in the 3D View using the Toggle Assembly Visibility button in the 3D View toolbar. Renaming an Item The default name given to an item in the Project Tree only indicates what kind of item it is. It is recommended that you name an item so that it provides an indication of its overall purpose in the scheme of the project. You can rename any of the following items in the Project Tree: an open model a closed model a view a toolpath an assembly 26 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

33 a replica mesh a gem To rename an item: 1. Right-click on the item that you want to rename in the Project Tree to display its context-menu, and then click on the Rename menu option. 2. Type the new name that you want to give to the item. 3. Click anywhere in the empty space that surrounds the Project Tree to apply the name to the item. Moving an Item You can move any of the following items in the Project Tree from one position to another: the Root Assembly an assembly a replica mesh a gem When you move the Root Assembly or an assembly, all of its associated assemblies, replica meshes and gems are moved simultaneously. If you can see the expand icon beside the name of the assembly you want to move, this indicates that there are one or more other associated assemblies, replica meshes and/or gems that will also be moved. To move an item: 1. Click on the item in the Project Tree that you want to move, holding down the left mouse button. 2. Drag the original item onto the new item with which you now want to associate. If the mouse cursor is anywhere in the Project Tree that the item cannot be moved, it changes to. If the mouse cursor is over another item in the Project Tree already associated with the original, it changes to, indicating that only a copy of the item can be created there. If the mouse cursor is anywhere in the Project Tree that the item can be moved, it changes to. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 27

34 If you hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard when dragging an item, this forces a copy of the item to be created instead. 3. Release the mouse button to set the new position of the item in the Project Tree. If a copy of the item being moved is created, it adopts the name of the original item with the Copy of prefix by default. Duplicating an Item You can create a duplicate of any model in the Project Tree, whether it is open or closed. To duplicate a model: 1. Right-click on the model in the Project Tree that you want to duplicate to display its context-menu, then click on the Duplicate menu option. You cannot create a duplicate copy of the Models folder item in the Project Tree. A duplicate of the model is created directly below the the last model in the Project Tree. It is closed and adopts the name of the original model with a Copy of prefix by default. For example, a duplicate of a model named Model 1 is named Copy of Model 1. Cutting an Item You can cut the following items from the Project Tree: an assembly a replica mesh a gem You can cut an assembly or replica mesh from the Project Tree regardless of whether it is currently visible or not. For details, see Toggling the Display of an Item (on page 25). 28 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

35 The chosen item is removed from the Project Tree and placed on the ArtCAM clipboard. This is one way of deleting an item, but because it is placed on the ArtCAM clipboard it is not permanently lost. You can paste a copy of the item on the ArtCAM clipboard elsewhere in the Project Tree. If you cut two items in succession, the item from the original cut is replaced by the item from the second cut. To cut either an assembly, replica mesh or gem from the Project Tree: 1. Right-click on the assembly, replica mesh or gem in the Project Tree that you want to cut to display its context-menu, then click on the Cut menu option. The item is removed from the Project Tree and placed on the ArtCAM clipboard. Copying and Pasting an Item You can copy and paste any of the following items in the Project Tree: the Root Assembly an assembly a replica mesh a gem A copy of the chosen item in the Project Tree is placed on the ArtCAM clipboard. You can then paste the item on the ArtCAM clipboard elsewhere in the Project Tree. You can copy the Root Assembly, an assembly, a replica mesh or gem regardless of whether it is currently visible or not. For details, see Toggling the Display of an Item (on page 25). The Copy menu option differs from the Cut option, which refers to actually removing an item from the Project Tree and placing it on the ArtCAM clipboard. For details, see Cutting an Item (on page 28). When you copy the Root Assembly or an assembly, all of its associated assemblies, replica meshes and gems are copied simultaneously. If you can see the expand icon beside the name of the assembly you want to copy, this indicates that there are one or more other associated assemblies that will also be copied to the ArtCAM clipboard. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 29

36 You can only paste the item(s) on the ArtCAM clipboard beneath the Root Assembly or an individual assembly in the Project Tree. If you copy the Root Assembly to the ArtCAM clipboard and then paste it in the Project Tree, it is displayed as a new assembly. To create a copy of an item: 1. Right-click on the item that you want to copy to display its contextmenu, and then click on the Copy menu option to place a copy of the item on the ArtCAM clipboard. To paste an item: 1. Click to select the assembly item in the Project Tree beneath which you want to associate the item(s) on the ArtCAM clipboard. 2. Right-click on the item to display its context-menu, then click on the Paste menu option to paste a copy of the item and all of its associated items on the ArtCAM clipboard to the Project Tree directly beneath the selected item. Deleting an Item You can delete any item from the Project Tree, other than: the Models folder an open model the Root Assembly the Views item ; and the Toolpaths item To delete an item: 1. Right-click on the item that you want to delete from the Project Tree to display its context-menu, and then click on the Delete menu option. Saving a Project You can save a project as an ArtCAM Project File (*.3dp) only. To save the project you are working on: 1. Click on the File > Save option from the Main Menu bar. 30 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

37 You can also save the project by pressing the Ctrl + S keys on your keyboard. If you are saving the project for the first time, the Save Project As... dialog box is displayed: You can also display the Save Project As... dialog box by clicking on the File > Save As... option from the Main Menu bar. First click on the Save in list box, followed by the folder on your computer in which you want to save the project. Now type the name that you want to give to the project file in the File name box. Next click on the Save button to save the project and close the Save Project As... dialog box. The name given to the saved project is shown to the right of the control icon in the main title bar: Thereafter any changes made to the project are saved immediately; overwriting the previous ArtCAM Project File (*.3dp). If you want to save a previously saved project with a different file name: 1. Click on the File > Save As... option from the Main Menu bar to display the Save Project As... dialog box. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 31

38 2. Click on the Save in list box, followed by the folder on your computer in which you want to save the project. 3. Type the new name that you want to give to the project file in the File name box. 4. Click on the Save button to save the project and close the Save Project As... dialog box. The new name given to the saved project replaces that which was originally shown to the right of the control icon in the main title bar. Closing a Project To close the project that you are working on: 1. Click on the File > Close Project menu option from the Main Menu bar. If you click on the File > Close Project menu option before saving a new project, or any changes that you may have made to an existing project, a message box is displayed asking if you want to save the project or not. If you want to save the project: Click on the Yes button to save the project and return to the Assistant's Getting Started page. The name of the saved project is listed beneath the Open Existing Project icon in the Projects area of the Assistant's Getting Started page and is also listed in the File menu on the Main Menu bar. If you close a project with a model still open, the model is closed simultaneously. If you do not want to save the project: 32 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

39 Click on the No button to close the message box and return to the Assistant's Getting Started page. If a previously saved project has not been changed in any way since it was opened, the project closes and ArtCAM JewelSmith returns to the Assistant's Getting Started page. Working With Models This section tells you how to create and manage models both independently and as part of a project. Creating a New Model A model is an ArtCAM proprietary file (*.art) which hosts the different aspects of a design: the vector and bitmap artwork, reliefs and toolpaths. You can create an ArtCAM model as part of a project or independently. There are seven different ways to create a new model as part of a project: defining its size using imperial or metric measurements (see "Creating a Model" on page 34). defining its size as an exact number of pixels (see "Creating a New Model Using Pixels" on page 36). from a compatible image stored on the Windows clipboard (see "Creating a New Model from an Image" on page 38). from a compatible image file (see "Creating a New Model from an Image" on page 38). from a compatible file (see "Creating a New Model from a File" on page 41). using a blank (see "Creating a New Model from a Blank" on page 49). using a shank (see "Creating a New Model from a Shank" on page 55). There are five different ways to create a new model independently: defining its size using imperial or metric measurements (see "Creating a Model" on page 34). defining its size as an exact number of pixels. from a compatible image stored on the Windows clipboard (see "Creating a New Model from an Image" on page 38). What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 33

40 from a compatible image file (see "Creating a New Model from an Image" on page 38). from a compatible file (see "Creating a New Model from a File" on page 41). In every new model, a 2D View and a 3D View design window is created in the workspace area. The 2D View window is the area in which you draw or edit the bitmap and vector artwork in your design that can be used to create threedimensional shapes across relief layers or 2D toolpaths. The 3D View window is the area in which you can view the composite relief, your calculated toolpaths and toolpath simulations, as well as the assemblies, replica meshes included in a project. Every new model, whether it is created independently or as part of a project, has at least a single default vector, bitmap and relief layer. Creating a Model To create a new model using a set of imperial or metric measurements: 1. If you are creating a model as part of a project: Right-click on the Models folder in the Project Tree to display its context-menu, then click on the New > Model... menu option. If you are creating a model independently: Click on the Create New Model icon in the Models area of the Assistant's Getting Started page. The Size For New Model dialog box is displayed: 34 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

41 You can also press the Ctrl + N keys on your keyboard to display the Size For New Model dialog box. 2. Make sure that the Units are set according to those in which you are working, either metric (mm) or imperial (inches), by clicking on the appropriate radio button. 3. Define the Height (Y) and Width (X) according to the physical size of the model that you want to create. 4. Click on the centre or any of the four corners of the box diagram to define the X-axis zero and Y-axis zero origin as shown below: 5. Click and drag the slider to set the resolution of the model according to the requirements of your job, as shown below: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 35

42 Click and drag the slider to the right to increase the resolution of the model. Click and drag the slider to the left to decrease the resolution. Generally, approximately 1,000,000 points is a reasonable resolution at which to work. You can use the Adjust Model Resolution button in the Model Editing toolset shown in the Model area of the Assistant's Home page to set the resolution after the model has been created. 6. Click on the OK button to create the model according to your settings. If you are creating a model as part of a project, an open model is shown beneath the Models folder in the Project Tree. Each new model is named (Untitled) by default. If you are creating a model independently, the open model is the root of the Project Tree. The model is named (Untitled) by default. Creating a New Model Using Pixels To create a new model using an exact number of pixels: 1. If you are creating a model independently: Click on the File > New > Model (Specify Pixel Size)... menu option from the Main Menu bar. 2. If you are creating a model as part of a project: Right-click on the Models folder in the Project Tree to display its context-menu, then click on the New > Model (Specify Pixel Size)... menu option. The Size For New Model In Pixels dialog box is displayed: 36 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

43 If you are using the Size For New Model In Pixels dialog box for the first time, the value displayed in both the Width and Height boxes is 500 by default. Thereafter, ArtCAM JewelSmith recalls the last pixel values you have used. If there is a compatible image on the Windows clipboard, the Open Clipboard option is active. If there is not, the option is greyed out. You can create a model from any Windows or OS/2 Bitmap (*.bmp), Windows or OS/2 DIB (*.dib), Windows or CompuServe RLE (*.rle), JPEG Image - JFIF Compliant (*.jpg, *.jpeg, *.jpe and *.jfif), CompuServe Graphics Interchange (*.gif), Windows Enhanced Meta File (*.emf), Windows Meta File (*.wmf), Tagged Image File Format (*.tif and *.tiff), Portable Network Graphics (*.png) or Windows Icon (*.ico) file currently on the Windows clipboard. 3. If you want to set the size of the model according to the exact number of pixels in the image on the Windows clipboard: Click to select the Open Clipboard option. The number of pixels in the clipboard image is shown in the Width and Height boxes. If you want a larger or smaller model than that resulting from the pixels found in the image on the Windows clipboard, type the new number of pixels in the Width and Height boxes. If you do not want to use the image on the Windows clipboard to set the size of the model: First make sure that the Open Clipboard option is deselected. If there is no compatible image on the Windows clipboard to begin with, the Open Clipboard option is already greyedout. Now define the width (X) of the model (in pixels) in the Width box Next define the height (Y) of the model (in pixels) in the Height box. 4. Click on the OK button to create the model according to the defined number of pixels. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 37

44 If you are creating a model as part of a project, an open model is shown beneath the Models folder in the Project Tree. Each new model is named (Untitled) by default. If you are creating a model independently, the open model is the root of the Project Tree. The model is named (Untitled) by default. Creating a New Model from an Image You can create a new model in ArtCAM JewelSmith using any of the following types of image file: Windows or OS/2 Bitmap (*.bmp) Windows or OS/2 DIB (*.dib) Windows or CompuServe RLE (*.rle) JPEG Image - JFIF Compliant (*.jpg, *.jpeg, *.jpe and *.jfif) CompuServe Graphics Interchange (*.gif) Windows Enhanced Meta File (*.emf) Windows Meta File (*.wmf) Tagged Image File Format (*.tif and *.tiff) Portable Network Graphics (*.png) Windows Icon (*.ico) To create a new model using an image file: 1. If you are creating a model as part of a project: Right-click on the Models folder in the Project Tree to display its context-menu, then click on the New > From Image File... option. If you are creating a model independently: Click on the File > New > From Image File... menu option from the Main Menu bar. 38 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

45 The Load Image dialog box is displayed: 2. Use either of the following methods to find the image file from which you want to create a model: By default, ArtCAM JewelSmith lists All Supported Files. You can display all available files by clicking on the Files of type list box followed by the All Files (*.*) option, or limit the files to compatible image files only by clicking to select the Bitmap Files (*.bmp; *.dib; *.rle; *.jpg; *.jpeg; *.jpe; *.jfif; *.gif; *.emf; *.wmf; *.tif; *.tiff; *.png; *.ico) option in the Files of type list box. You can use Look in list box and the Up One Level button to navigate to the folder containing the image file from which you want to create a model. 3. Click to select the image file from which you want to create the model. Its name is shown in the File name box. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 39

46 4. Click on the Open button to display the Set Model Size dialog box: The dimensions of the image file are shown in the Height and Width boxes; which are currently greyed-out. The Scanned d.p.i. option is selected in the Method area. 5. If you know the resolution at which the original image was scanned, type this in the d.p.i. box. If not, use that which is currently shown. 6. Make sure that the Units are set according to those in which you are working, either metric (mm) or imperial (inches), by clicking on the appropriate radio button. 7. Click on the radio button in the centre or on any of the four corners of the box diagram shown in the Origin area to define the X-axis zero and Y-axis zero origin in the model. 8. If you want to adjust the size of the image, and therefore the size of the resulting ArtCAM model: First select the Image Size option in the Method area by clicking on its radio button. Next define its new height (Y) in the Height box or its width in the Width box. The aspect ratio between the height and width is maintained. 9. To set the maximum Z height of the relief layer created from the image as part of the model, type the value in the Height in Z box. 40 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

47 The default value shown in the Height in Z box remains as 1.0 irrespective of the units in which you are working. Make sure that the Z height is correct. If you use an image with a high Z height, the resulting relief layer in the model is likely to be poor. You should only use images with a low Z height, such as textures. 10. Click on the OK button to close the dialog box and create the model. If you are creating a model as part of a project, an open model is shown beneath the Models folder in the Project Tree. Each new model is named (Untitled) by default. If you are creating a model independently, the open model is the root of the Project Tree. The model is named (Untitled) by default. The image from which the model was created is hosted on the default bitmap layer named Bitmap Layer, and is shown in the 2D View window. If you have used a colour image file, it is stored as a greyscale image on the default bitmap layer. The content on the default relief layer resulting from the image is shown in the 3D View window. The maximum Z height is displayed in the Model Information area of the Assistant's Home page. Creating a New Model from a File You can create a model using the Open dialog box, which contains standard Windows features. You can create a new model in ArtCAM JewelSmith by opening a file saved in any of the following file formats: ArtCAM Model (*.art) ArtCAM Relief (*.rlf) Windows or OS/2 Bitmap (*.bmp) Windows or OS/2 DIB (*.dib) Windows or CompuServe RLE (*.rle) JPEG Image - JFIF Compliant (*.jpg, *.jpeg, *.jpe and *.jfif) What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 41

48 CompuServe Graphics Interchange (*.gif) Windows Enhanced Meta File (*.emf) Windows Meta File (*.wmf) Tagged Image File Format (*.tif and *.tiff) Portable Network Graphics (*.png) Windows Icon (*.ico) Drawing Interchange Format, including PowerSHAPE and AutoCAD (*.dxf) AutoCAD 2D Drawing (*.dwg) Lotus, PC Paint or DUCT picture (*.pic) Delcam DGK (*.dgk) Portable Document Format (*.pdf) To create a new model from a compatible file: 1. If you are creating a new model as part of a project: Right-click on the Models folder in the Project Tree to display its context-menu, then click on the New > From File... option. If you are creating a new model independently, you can: Click on the Open Existing Model icon in the Models area of the Assistant's start page Press the Ctrl + O keys on your keyboard; or Click on the File > Open... option from the Main Menu bar. If you are creating a new model with another already open, you can: Click on the Open File button in the File area of the Assistant's Home page Press the Ctrl + O keys on your keyboard; or Click on the File > Open... option from the Main Menu bar. 42 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

49 If you are working within a project and have not saved any changes that have been made to the open model before attempting to create a new model, a message box is displayed asking if you want to update the project: Click on the Yes button to save the changes to the open model before it is closed. If you have not made any changes to the current model either whatsoever or since it was saved previously, it is closed immediately. If you have not saved any changes that have been made to the open model before attempting to create another, a message box is displayed asking if you want to save the changes to the model. If you have not made any changes to the current model either whatsoever or since it was saved previously, it is closed immediately. The Open dialog box is displayed: 2. If you are creating a model from the Assistant's Getting Started page, use any of the following methods to display the Open dialog box: Click on the Open Existing Model icon area of the Assistant's Getting Started page Press the Ctrl + O keys on your keyboard; or in the Models What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 43

50 Click on the File > Open... option from the Main Menu bar. If you are creating a model with another already open in ArtCAM JewelSmith, use any of the following methods to display the Open dialog box: Click on the Open File button in the File area of the Assistant's Home page or on the Top Toolbar. Press the Ctrl + O keys on your keyboard; or Click on the File > Open... option from the Main Menu bar. If you have not saved any changes that have been made to the open model before attempting to open another, a message box is displayed asking if you want to save the changes to the model. If you have not made any changes to the current model either whatsoever or since it was saved previously, it is closed immediately. 3. Use either of the following methods to find the file from which you want to create a model: 44 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

51 By default, ArtCAM JewelSmith lists All Supported Files. You can display all available files by clicking on the Files of type list box followed by the All Files (*.*) option, or limit the files to a specific format by clicking to select the specific file type in the Files of type list box. You can use Look in list box and the Up One Level button to navigate to the folder containing the file from which you want to create a model. 4. Once you have located the file from which you want to create a model, click on its file name to select it. When you select the file, the Relief Info area of the dialog displays the file's dimensions in actual measurements and pixels where possible. The Model Preview area displays a thumbnail image of the file's contents where possible. If you select an ArtCAM model file (*.art), the thumbnail image shown in the Model Preview area contains the contents of the active 2D View window when the model was last saved. When choosing a bitmap image, the greyscale representation shown in the Relief Info area provides an indication of the form that the resulting relief shall take. Consider that the brightest areas of the greyscale image reflect the highest areas in the resulting relief, while the darkest areas reflect the lowest. 5. If you are creating a model from a *.bmp, *.gif, *.jpg, *.jpeg, *.jpe, *.jfif, *.tif or *.tiff image file, define in the Max Z box the maximum depth of the relief layer that you want to allow ArtCAM JewelSmith to calculate. The default value in the Min Z box is mm and the default value in the Max Z box is mm. Make sure that the Z heights are correct. If you assign a high Z height to an image file, the detail in the resulting relief layer is likely to be poor. You should only assign a low Z height. If you are using a Drawing Interchange File (*.dxf), Delcam DGK (*.dgk) or Portable Document File (*.pdf), ArtCAM JewelSmith cannot generate a relief layer from the artwork within the file. 6. Click on the Open button. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 45

52 If you have selected an ArtCAM Model file (*.art), the Open dialog box closes, its design windows are displayed in the workspace area and all layer information is shown on the Layers tab. If you have selected an ArtCAM Relief file (*.rlf), the Open dialog box closes, a greyscale image of the composite relief is displayed in the 2D View window. A single default vector, bitmap and relief layer is listed on the Layers tab. If you have selected a Windows Bitmap (*.bmp), CompuServe image (*.gif), JPEG (*.jpg, *.jpeg, *.jpe or *.jfif), or Tagged Image Format (*.tif or *.tiff) file, the Open dialog box closes, then the Set Model Size dialog box is displayed with the Image size option in the Method area selected by default: If you know the resolution at which the image was originally scanned, select the Scanned d.p.i option by clicking on its radio button and then type this value in the d.p.i. box. If you do not, then leave the value as it is currently shown. Make sure that the Units are set according to those in which you are working, metric (mm) or imperial (inches), by clicking on the appropriate radio button. Define the height (Y) of the model in the Height box, followed by the width (X) in the Width box. Define the X-axis zero and Y-axis zero origin in the model by clicking on the appropriate radio button on the diagram in the Origin area. 46 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

53 Click on the OK button to close the dialog box and create the model. A single default vector, bitmap and relief layer is listed on the Layers tab. If you select a Drawing Interchange Format (*.dxf), AutoCAD 2D drawing (*.dwg), DUCT picture (*.pic), Delcam DGK (*.dgk) or Portable Document Format (*.pdf) file, the Open dialog box closes, then the Size For New Model dialog box is displayed: For details on how to complete the Size For New Model dialog box, see Creating a Model (on page 34). Click on the OK button to close the Size For New Model dialog box. If you are opening a Delcam DGK file (*.dgk) and it does not contain any vector artwork, the following message box is displayed: Click on the OK button to close the message box. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 47

54 If you are opening a Drawing Interchange (*.dxf) or AutoCAD 2D drawing (*.dwg) file, the Imported File dialog box is displayed: If you click on the Cancel button a model is created equal to the dimensions previously seen in the Size For New Model dialog box, but the vector artwork in the original file is not included in the model. If you want to include the vector artwork, make sure that the settings are correct: If you want to position the imported vector data in the centre of the vector layer, click to select the Centre in Page option. Make sure that the units of measurement (mm or inches) for the imported vector data are the same as those being used in the ArtCAM model by clicking on the appropriate radio button in the File Units area. If you want to identify all self-intersecting spans in the vector data within tolerance, make sure that the Check for crossings and self-intersections option is selected and that the appropriate tolerance is defined in the Intersection Tolerance box. Self-intersecting spans are shown in red when selected with white circular shapes marking the positions where the spans overlap. 48 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

55 If you want to rejoin any spans in the vector data that have been 'exploded' within tolerance, make sure that the Automatically rejoin vectors option is selected and that the appropriate tolerance is defined in the Rejoining Tolerance box. Click on the OK button to close the dialog box and import the vector artwork. Any layer information within Drawing Interchange (*.dxf) or Delcam DGK (*.dgk) files is preserved in ArtCAM JewelSmith. A separate vector layer is created for each layer within the original file. If you are opening a Portable Document File (*.pdf), ArtCAM JewelSmith creates a new model with a separate vector and bitmap layer for each of the pages within the PDF document and names each of the layers using the filename_page number convention. For example, the layer relating to the first page of the document might be labelled Brochure_(1). ArtCAM JewelSmith does not currently support layers (or 'Optional Content Groups') within Portable Document Format files (*.pdf). Creating a New Model from a Blank When creating a blank, otherwise known as an empty component, an ArtCAM model is created as part of the project according to the settings you define. This ArtCAM model may or may not contain vector artwork, other than a Reference Silhouette and Reference Guidelines. To create a model using any blank other than a Rotary Flush: 1. Click to select the Models folder in the Project Tree. Its name is now shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 2. Click on the button in the New Blanks area representing the component that you want to create to display its associated settings: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 49

56 3. Type the name that you want to give to the empty component in the Name box. Each of the components is given a different default name. 4. If you are creating any blank other than a 3-Axis Flat or Rotary Setting: First click on the Standard list box, followed by the option for the national standard system in which you want to create the empty component. If you have selected anything other than the Custom option: Click on the Size list box, followed by the size of empty component that you want to create. If you have selected the Custom option, or are creating a Rotary Setting blank: Define the diameter of the empty component in the Diameter box. 5. If you are creating any blank other than a Rotary Setting: Define the width of the empty component in the Width box. Define the resolution of the model in the Resolution box. If you are creating any blank other than a 3-Axis Flat: Define the border you want to apply around the empty component in the Border box. Define the distance between the inner and outer diameter of the empty component in the Thickness box. If you are creating a 3-Axis Flat or Rotary Setting blank: Define the height of the empty component in the Height box. 6. Click on the Accept button to close the settings and create the ArtCAM model for the component. An open model is shown beneath the Models folder in the Project Tree. The model is named according to that given when defining the blank's settings. For example, ThreeAxisShank. If you create a 3-Axis Flat, 3-Axis Shank, 3-Axis Shank (Vertical) or 3-Axis Shank (Vertical) Aligned blank, only the Gem Tools area is displayed on the Assistant's Home page. 50 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

57 If you create a Rotary Axis Shank, Rotary Setting blank, then both the Gem Tools and Rotary Relief Tools areas are displayed on the Assistant's Home page. ArtCAM JewelSmith calculates the necessary dimensions of the model according to the settings associated with the chosen blank. The resulting model is always in metric measurements. If you have created a 3-Axis Flat blank: A model named ThreeAxisFlat by default is created. Two locked reference guideline vectors in the model area. This artwork is hosted on the Reference Lines vector layer. If you have created a 3-Axis Shank blank: A model named ThreeAxisShank by default is created. Two locked reference guideline vectors are created in the model area; one marking the vertical centreline and the other marking the horizontal centreline. This artwork is hosted on the Reference Lines vector layer. Two locked concentric circular vectors representing the inner and outer diameter of the ring, offset by the previously defined Thickness, are created in the model area. This artwork is hosted on the Reference Silhouette vector layer. If you have created a 3-Axis Shank (Vertical) Aligned blank: A model named ThreeAxisShankVA by default is created. Two locked reference guideline vectors are created in the model area; one marking the vertical centreline and the other marking the horizontal centreline. This artwork is hosted on the Reference Lines vector layer. Two locked vertical rectangular vectors representing the inner and outer diameter of the ring, offset by the previously defined Thickness, are created in the model area. This artwork is hosted on the Reference Silhouette vector layer. If you have created a 3-Axis Shank (Vertical) blank: A model named ThreeAxisShankV by default is created. Two locked reference guideline vectors are created in the model area; one marking the vertical centreline and the other marking the horizontal centreline. This artwork is hosted on the Reference Lines vector layer. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 51

58 Two locked horizontal rectangular vectors representing the inner and outer diameter of the ring, offset by the previously defined Thickness, are created in the model area. This artwork is hosted on the Reference Silhouette vector layer. If you have created a Rotary Axis Shank blank: A model named RotaryAxisShank by default is created. Two locked reference guideline vectors are created in the model area; one marking the vertical centreline and the other marking the horizontal centreline. This artwork is hosted on the Reference Lines vector layer. Two locked concentric circular vectors representing the inner and outer diameter of the ring, offset by the previously defined Thickness, are created below the model area. This artwork is hosted on the Reference Silhouette vector layer. If you have created a Rotary Setting blank: A model named Setting by default is created. Two locked reference guideline vectors are created in the model area; one marking the vertical centreline and the other marking the horizontal centreline. This artwork is hosted on the Reference Lines vector layer. Two locked concentric circular vectors representing the inner and outer diameter of the ring, offset by the previously defined Thickness, are created below the model area. This artwork is drawn on the Reference Silhouette vector layer. To create a model using a Rotary Flush blank: 1. Click to select the Models folder in the Project Tree. Its name is now shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 2. Click on the Rotary Flush button in the New Blanks area to display its settings. 3. Click on the button representing the shape of gem that you want to include in the flush setting. 4. If you have selected a Box Radiant, Heart, Marquise, Oval, Pear, Princess or Round shape: 52 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

59 First click on the Standard list box, followed by the standard system in which you want to define the gem dimensions. The Size list box is greyed-out when the Custom option is selected in the Standard list box. If you have selected the Custom option, define the length, width and depth of the gem in the Length, Width and Height boxes. If you have selected the Carat option, click on the Size list box followed by the size of gem that you want to create according to standard carat weights for your chosen shape of stone. If you adjust the default value displayed in the Length, Width or Depth box, the option in the Standard list box changes to Custom. If you have select a Brilliant, Emerald, Hexagon, Triangle or Trillion shape: Define the length of the gem in the Length box. Define the width of the gem in the Width box. Define the height of the gem in the Height box. 5. Click on the Next button to display the next group of settings. 6. Click on the button representing the colour of the gemstone that you want to use in the flush setting. If you click on the Custom button, the Color dialog box is displayed. 7. Type the name that you want to give to the flush setting in the Name box. It is named xflushsetting by default; where x is equal to the shape of the gem used. For example, BoxRadiantFlushSetting. 8. Define the height of the setting from the gem's girdle in the Top Allowance (A) box. 9. Define the depth of the setting from the gem's lowest point in the Bottom Allowance (B) box. 10. Define the thickness of the setting wall in the Wall Thickness (C) box. 11. Define the angle of the setting wall in the Wall Angle (D) box. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 53

60 12. If you want to position the flush setting on rotary relief, make sure that the Position On Ring option is selected 13. Click on the Next button to create the flush setting. A model is created beneath the Models folder in the Project Tree. The model is named xflushsetting by default is created; where x is equal to the shape of the gem used. For example, HexagonFlushSetting. ArtCAM JewelSmith calculates the necessary dimensions of the model according to the settings associated with the flush setting. The resulting model is always in metric measurements. The resulting model contains: Two locked reference guideline vectors in the model area; one marking the vertical centreline and the other marking the horizontal centreline. This artwork is hosted on the Reference Lines vector layer. Two locked concentric circular vectors below the model area. This artwork is drawn on the Reference Silhouette vector layer. Additional vector artwork in the model area and about the Reference Silhouette and this is hosted across the Default Layer, Inner Vectors and Outer Vectors vector layers. Both the Gem Tools and Rotary Relief Tools areas are displayed on the Assistant's Home page. 14. If you want to edit any of the settings associated with the flush setting: First define the new values in the boxes displayed. Next click on the Rebuild button. The current model is deleted and a new model is created in its place. Do not add any decorative detail to the flush setting before clicking on the Rebuild button, otherwise it will be lost during the recalculation process. 15. If you are happy with the overall shape of the flush setting, click on the Next button. 16. If you want to add any decorative detail to the flush setting: 54 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

61 First edit the composite relief until it represents the finished flush setting. Next click on the Rebuild button. A triangle mesh of the composite relief is calculated, although this is not yet added to the Project Tree. If you do not want to add any decorative detail to the flush setting, go to the next step. If you click on the Back button and then use the Rebuild button after adjusting any properties associated with the flush setting, all decorative detail will be lost. 17. Click on the Accept button to add the flush setting to the project. The model shown beneath the Models folder is now closed. 18. Click on the expand icon beside the Root Assembly in the Project Tree to display its associated items. The items associated with the flush setting are now displayed. The items associated with a flush setting comprise an assembly, with an associated gem and replica mesh. Both the assembly and the replica mesh adopt the name of the model. For example, RoundFlushSetting. The gem adopts the name of the model, along with the Gem suffix. For example, RoundFlushSettingGem. Creating a New Model from a Shank When creating a shank, an ArtCAM model is created as part of the project according to the settings you define. To create a model using a shank: 1. Click to select the Models folder in the Project Tree. Its name is now shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 55

62 2. Click on the button in the New Shanks area representing the shank that you want to create to display its settings: 3. Type the name that you want to give to the empty component in the Name box. Each of the shanks is given a different default name. 4. If you are creating any of the available shanks: First click on the Standard list box, followed by the option for the national standard system in which you want to create the shank. If you have selected anything other than the Custom option, click on the Size list box followed by the size of shank that you want to create. If you have selected the Custom option, define the diameter of the shank in the Diameter box. Next define the border that you want to apply around the shank in the Border box. Now define the resolution of the model in the Resolution box. 5. If you are creating any of the shanks other than the Tapered Round, Tapered Square or Tapered Knife Edge: Define the width of the shank in the Width box. Define the distance between the inner and outer diameter of the shank in the Thickness box. 6. If you are creating a Tapered Round, Tapered Square or Tapered Knife Edge shank: Click on the Next button to display the next group of settings. First define the thickness of the top of the tapered shank in the Top Thickness box. Next define the thickness of the bottom of the tapered shank in the Bottom Thickness box. 56 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

63 Next define the width at the top of the tapered shank in the Top Width box. Now define the width at the bottom of the tapered shank in the Bottom Width box. 7. Click on the Next button to create the shank according to your settings. A model is created beneath the Models folder in the Project Tree. The model is named according to that specified when defining the shank's settings. For example, TaperedKnifeEdgeShank. ArtCAM JewelSmith calculates the necessary dimensions of the model according to the settings associated with the shank. The resulting model is always in metric measurements. The resulting model contains: Two locked reference guideline vectors in the model area; one marking the vertical centreline and the other marking the horizontal centreline. This artwork is hosted on the Reference Lines vector layer. Two locked concentric circular vectors below the model area. This artwork is drawn on the Reference Silhouette vector layer. A circular vector drawn about the outer circle below the model area; used as a ring silhouette if the shank is rebuilt. This artwork is drawn on the Default Layer vector layer. Two parallel horizontal linear vectors drawn in the model area; both used as drive rails when the shank is calculated. This artwork is drawn on the Default Layer vector layer. Two profile vectors drawn in the model area; both used as cross-sections when the shank is calculated. This artwork is drawn on the Default Layer vector layer. Both the Gem Tools and Rotary Relief Tools areas are displayed on the Assistant's Home page. The vector artwork drawn on the Default Layer vector layer is essentially used to calculate a two-rail swept ring shape. A rotary relief is associated with the model. The rotary relief is shown in the 3D View window by default. 8. If you want to adjust the overall shape of the shank: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 57

64 First edit the default vector artwork used to create the shank. Although you can edit the shape of the drive rails, crosssections and ring silhouette drawn in the model, you cannot replace them with different vectors altogether. You can reposition any of the vectors used to create the shank, although moving the ring silhouette may cause unwanted results. Next click on the Rebuild button. The new shank shape is calculated using the edited vector artwork. Do not add any decorative detail to the shank before clicking on the Rebuild button, otherwise it will be lost during the recalculation process. If you do not want to change the shape of the shank, go to the next step. If you click on the Back button, the current model is closed. The model icon in the Project Tree indicates this. 9. Click on the Accept button to close the settings. The model beneath the Models folder in the Project Tree remains open. If you click to select the model in the Project Tree, the Base Height is included in the Model Information area. If you are creating a Plain, Square or Knife Edge shank, the Base Height is equal to the Thickness of the shank. If you are creating a Tapered Round, Tapered Square or Tapered Knife Edge shank, the Base Height is equal to the average of the Top Thickness and Bottom Thickness. Opening an Existing Model You can open an ArtCAM model as part of a project or independently. To open a model that is part of a project: 58 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

65 1. Right-click on the closed model in the Project Tree that you want to open to display its context-menu, and then click on the Edit option to open the model. The Assistant's Home page is displayed by default. You can also double-click on the closed model in the Project Tree to open the model. The icon associated with the model in the Project Tree changes from to, indicating that it is now open. The open model is always last in the list of models beneath the Models folder in the Project Tree. To open a model independently: 1. If you are opening a model with no model currently open, use any of the following methods to display the Open dialog box: Click on the Open Existing Model icon area of the page Press the Ctrl + O keys on your keyboard; or in the Model What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 59

66 Click on the File > Open... option from the Main Menu bar. If you are opening a model with another already open in ArtCAM JewelSmith, use any of the following methods to display the Open dialog box: Click on the Open File button in the File area of the Assistant's Home page. Press the Ctrl + O keys on your keyboard; or Click on the File > Open... option from the Main Menu bar. If you have not saved any changes that have been made to the open model before attempting to open another model, a message box is displayed asking if you want to save the changes to the model. For further details, see Saving a Model. If you have not made any changes to the model either whatsoever or since it was saved previously, it is closed immediately. 60 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

67 2. Use either of the following methods to find the file that you want to open as a model: By default, ArtCAM JewelSmith lists All Supported Files. You can display all available files by clicking on the Files of type list box followed by the All Files (*.*) option, or limit the files to a particular format by clicking to select the specific file type in the Files of Type list box. You cannot open ArtCAM Project Files (*.3dp) or 3D Assembly Files (*.3da) as a model. If you select a file in either of these formats, a project is opened instead. You can use Look in list box and the Up One Level button to navigate to the folder on your computer containing the file that you want to open as a model. 3. Once you have located the file that you want to open as a model, click on its name to select it. When you select the file, the Relief Info area of the dialog box displays the file's dimensions in actual measurements and pixels. The Model Preview area displays a thumbnail image of the file's contents. If you select an ArtCAM Model file (*.art), the thumbnail image shown in the Model Preview area contains the contents of the active 2D View window when the model was saved. When choosing a bitmap image, the greyscale representation shown in the Relief Info area provides an indication of the form that the resulting relief shall take. Consider that the brightest areas of the greyscale image reflect the highest areas in the resulting relief, while the darkest areas reflect the lowest. 4. Click on the Open button. Depending on which file you have selected, ArtCAM JewelSmith either opens the model immediately or begins the process of creating a model. When opening large files, a progress bar is shown in the status bar area: If you have selected an ArtCAM Model file (*.art), the Open dialog box closes and its design windows are displayed in the workspace area. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 61

68 If you have selected an ArtCAM Relief file (*.rlf), the Open dialog box closes, and a greyscale image of the relief is displayed in the 2D View window. If you have selected a Windows Bitmap (*.bmp), CompuServe image (*.gif), JPEG (*.jpg, *.jpeg, *.jpe or *.jfif), or Tagged Image Format (*.tif or *.tiff) file, the Open dialog box closes, then the Set Model Size dialog box is displayed with the Image size option in the Method area selected by default: If you know the resolution at which the image was originally scanned, select the Scanned d.p.i option by clicking on its radio button and then type this value in the d.p.i. box. If you do not, then leave the value as it is currently shown. Make sure that the Units are set according to those in which you are working, metric (mm) or imperial (inches), by clicking on the appropriate radio button. Define the height (Y) of the model in the Height box, followed by the width (X) in the Width box. Define the X-axis zero and Y-axis zero origin in the model by clicking on the appropriate radio button on the diagram in the Origin area. Click on the OK button to close the dialog box and create the model. The bitmap artwork is shown in the 2D View window. 62 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

69 If you select a Drawing Interchange Format (*.dxf), AutoCAD 2D drawing (*.dwg), DUCT picture (*.pic), Delcam DGK (*.dgk) or Portable Document Format (*.pdf) file, the Open dialog box closes, then the Size For New Model dialog box is displayed: For details on how to use the settings in the Size For New Model dialog box, see Creating a Model (on page 34). Click on the OK button to close the Size For New Model dialog box. If you are opening a Delcam DGK file (*.dgk) and it does not contain any vector artwork, a message box is displayed warning that the file cannot be used: Click on the OK button to close the message box. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 63

70 If you are opening a Drawing Interchange (*.dxf) or AutoCAD 2D drawing (*.dwg) file, the Imported File dialog box is displayed: If you click on the Cancel button a model is created equal to the dimensions previously seen in the Size For New Model dialog box, but the vector artwork in the original file is not included in the model. If you want to import the vector artwork, make sure that the settings are correct: If you want to position the imported vector artwork in the centre of the model area, click to select the Centre in Page option. Make sure that the units of measurement (mm or inches) for the imported vector data are the same as those being used in the ArtCAM model by clicking on the appropriate radio button in the File Units area. If you want to identify all self-intersecting spans in the vector data within tolerance, make sure that the Check for crossings and self-intersections option is selected and that the appropriate tolerance is defined in the Intersection Tolerance box. All self-intersecting spans within the imported vector artwork are shown in red when selected, and a black icon marks each of the positions where spans overlap. 64 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

71 If you want to rejoin any spans in the vector data that have been 'exploded' within tolerance, make sure that the Automatically rejoin vectors option is selected and that the appropriate tolerance is defined in the Rejoining Tolerance box. Click on the OK button to close the dialog box and import the vector artwork. The vector artwork is displayed in the 2D View window. Any layer information within Drawing Interchange (*.dxf) or Delcam DGK (*.dgk) files is preserved in ArtCAM JewelSmith. A separate vector layer is created for each layer within the original file. If you are opening a Portable Document File (*.pdf), ArtCAM JewelSmith creates a new model with a separate vector and bitmap layer for each of the pages within the PDF document and names each of the layers using the filename_page number convention. For example, the layer relating to the first page of the document might be labelled Brochure_(1). All of the resulting vector and bitmap artwork is displayed in the 2D View window. For further information, see Creating a New Layer. ArtCAM JewelSmith does not currently support layers (or 'Optional Content Groups') within Portable Document Format files (*.pdf). The model is the root of the Project Tree shown on the Project tab. The model is named (Untitled) by default. Opening Recent Models When working with models independently, you can quickly open any of your four most recent models. To open a model that you were working on recently: 1. Beneath the Open Existing Model icon in the Models area of the Assistant's start page, click the name of the model that you want to open. If you position the mouse cursor over the icon beside any of the four models listed in the Models area of the Assistant's Getting Started page, its location on your computer is displayed. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 65

72 You can also open recently saved models by clicking on the File option in the Main Menu bar, followed by the name of the required model listed above the Exit option. A combination of up to four models and projects are listed at once. Creating a Duplicate Model You can create a duplicate copy of any model in the Project Tree, whether it is currently open or not. To create a duplicate copy of a model: 1. Right-click on the model in the Project Tree that you want to duplicate to display its context-menu, and then click on the Duplicate menu option. You cannot create a duplicate copy of the Models folder item in the Project Tree. A duplicate copy of the model is created directly below the last model in the Project Tree. It is closed and adopts the name of the original model with a Copy of prefix by default. For example, a duplicate of a model named Model 1 is named Copy of Model 1. Saving a Model You can save a model as an ArtCAM Model File (*.art) only. To save a model you are working on as part of the current project: Right-click on the open model in the Project Tree to display its context menu, and then click on the Update Project menu option. When working within a project, any changes that you make to a model can be saved using the Update Project option on the context-menu displayed by right-clicking on an open model in the Project Tree. However, the updated model is not saved as part of the project until the project itself is saved again. You can use any of the following methods to save a model when working outside of a project: Click on the Save button in the File area of the Assistant's Home page. Click on the File > Save... menu option on the Main Menu bar. 66 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

73 Press the Ctrl + S keys on your keyboard. If you are saving the model for the first time, the Save Model As... dialog box is displayed: The ArtCAM Model (*.art) option shown in the Save as type list box is the only file format in which you can save the model. First click on the Save in list box, followed by the folder on your computer in which you want to save the model. Now type the name that you want to give to the model in the File name box. Next click on the Save button to save the model and close the dialog box. Thereafter any changes made to the model are saved immediately; overwriting the previous model file (*.art). Closing a Model To close the model that you are working on as part of a project: 1. Right-click the open model in the Project Tree to display its context-menu, then click the Close option. If you have not made any changes to the model since it was opened, it closes immediately. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 67

74 The model icon in the Project Tree changes to ; indicating that it is now closed. If you attempt to close the model before saving any changes that you have made since it was opened, a message box is displayed asking if you want to update the project with your changes: If you want to save the changes to the model before it is closed: Click the Yes button. The message box closes and the model icon in the Project Tree changes to ; indicating that it is now closed. If you want to close the model without saving any changes since it was either created or saved previously: Click on No button. The message box closes and the model icon in the Project Tree changes to ; indicating that it is now closed. To close the model that you are working on independently: 1. Click the File > Close Model menu option from the Main Menu bar. If you click the File > Close Model menu option before saving a new model, or any changes that you may have made to an existing model, a message box is displayed asking if you want to save your changes: If you do not want to save the changes to the model before it is closed: Click the No button to close the message box and return to the Assistant's start page. If you want to save the changes to the model before it is closed: 68 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

75 Click the Yes button. If you are saving the model for the first time, the Save Model As... dialog box is displayed: First click the Save in list box followed by the folder on your computer in which you want to save the model. Now type the name that you want to give to the model in the File name box. Next click the Save button to save the model, close the dialog box and return to the Assistant's Home page. The ArtCAM Model (*.art) option shown in the Save as type list box is the only file format in which you can save the model. If you are working with a previously saved model, any changes made are saved immediately; overwriting the previous model file (*.art). The names of the four most recent saved models are listed beneath the Open Existing Model icon in the Models area of the Assistant's start page as well as in the File menu on the Main Menu bar. For details, see Opening Recent Models (on page 65). If an existing model has not changed in any way since it was opened, the model closes and ArtCAM JewelSmith returns to the Assistant's start page. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 69

76 Importing a Model You can import an ArtCAM Model (*.art) into an open project. The model is saved as part of the project immediately after it is imported. You can import a model regardless of whether or not another model which is already part of the current project is open. If you import a model when another listed in the Project Tree is already open, the imported model is not opened in its place. All models remain closed after being imported into a project. To import an ArtCAM model into the current project: 1. Right-click on the Models folder in the Project Tree to display its context-menu, then click on the Import... menu option to display the Import Model dialog box: 2. Click on the Look in list box followed by the folder on your computer in which the ArtCAM model that you want to import is stored. 3. Click on the name of the ArtCAM model that you want to import. Its name is displayed in the File name box. 4. Click on the Open button to import the selected ArtCAM model into the current project. If this is the first model that you have imported: the expand icon is now shown beside the Models folder in the Project Tree. 70 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

77 5. Click on the expand icon to expand the Models folder and display all of the models associated with the current project. If the collapse icon is shown beside the Models folder, all of the models associated with the current project are already visible in the Project Tree. You cannot adjust the order in which the models are listed in the Project Tree. If this is the first model that you have imported: a new ArtCAM model is shown directly beneath the Models folder in the Project Tree. This icon indicates that the model is currently closed. If this is not the first model that you have imported: a new ArtCAM model is shown directly below the previous model in the Project Tree. You can click on the collapse icon beside the Models folder to hide the list of models in the current project. Exporting a Model You can export a model from a project as an ArtCAM model file (*.art) only. When exporting a model, all of its associated elements are exported simultaneously. This includes all vector and bitmap artwork, relief layers and toolpaths. To export a model: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 71

78 1. Right-click on the model in the Project Tree that you want to export to display its context-menu, then click on the Export... menu option to display the Export Model dialog box: You can export a model from the Project Tree when it is open or closed. The icon indicates that a model is closed, while the icon indicates that a model is open. 2. Click on the Save in list box and select the folder on your computer in which you want to save the model. 3. Define a name for the model in the File name box. 4. Click on the Save button to close the dialog box and save the model file. Deleting a Model You can delete any model from a project, although it must be closed first. To delete a model: 72 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

79 1. Right-click on the closed model in the Project Tree that you want to delete to display its context-menu, and then click on the Delete menu option. A message box is displayed asking if you want to delete the model or not: 2. Click on the Yes button to close the message box and delete the model from the Project Tree. You cannot delete the Models folder Tree. from the Project Working With Assemblies This section tells you how to work with the Root Assembly and assemblies as part of a project. Creating an Empty Assembly You can add an empty assembly to the Project Tree. No associated ArtCAM model file (*.art) is created along with the empty assembly, although you can associate an existing or imported replica mesh with this. To create an empty assembly in the Project Tree: 1. Click to select the Root Assembly or an assembly in the Project Tree. Its name is shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 2. Right-click on the selected assembly to display its context-menu, then click on the New menu option. 3. Click on the expand icon beside the selected assembly in the Project Tree to display its associated items. A new assembly is created directly beneath the Root Assembly or assembly, depending on which was originally selected, and this is named New Assembly by default. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 73

80 To change the name of the assembly, see Renaming an Item (on page 26) or Viewing the Attributes of an Assembly (on page 88) for details. Creating a Component from an Empty Assembly You can import a component into a project using the Root Assembly or an empty assembly in the Project Tree. An empty assembly has no associated ArtCAM model file, replica mesh or gem setting. An empty assembly is easily identified in the Project Tree as having no expand or collapse icon beside it. To import a component into the project: 1. Click to select the Root Assembly or an empty assembly with which you want to associate a component. Its name is now shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. An empty assembly is named NewAssembly by default, although you may have already changed its name. See Renaming an Item (on page 26) or Viewing the Attributes of an Assembly (on page 88) for details. 2. Click on the Open Mesh Library button in the Libraries area to display the Component Library settings. 3. Click on the Libraries list box, followed by the library from which you want to use a component. There are four default libraries: Bosses, Primitives, Settings and Shanks (3mm Setting). The default libraries are located in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\ArtCAM Files\Component Libraries folder on your computer. If you are using Windows Vista, the default libraries are located in the C:\Users\Public\Documents\ArtCAM Files\Component Libraries folder on your computer. The components associated with the selected library are displayed below the Advanced Options area of the page. 74 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

81 For each of the sub-folders within the Component Libraries folder on your computer, there is an option listed in the Libraries list box. If a sub-folder contains additional folders, each of them result in their own separate area displayed on the page. The control bar associated with each of these areas adopts the name of the folder. For each ArtCAM Assembly File (*.3da) within the folder, there is a button displayed on the page. This button adopts the name of the ArtCAM Assembly File (*.3da). If a CompuServe image (*.gif), JPEG image ( *.jpeg) or Portable Network Graphics (*.png) file within the same folder shares the same name as the ArtCAM Assembly File (*.3da), a thumbnail image is displayed on the button. You can toggle the display of the buttons associated with each area on the page. Click on the arrow icon on the control bar to hide the set of buttons currently shown below: Click on the arrow icon on the control bar to display the set of buttons directly below: If you have selected the Bosses library, there is only one area displayed by default. If you have selected the Primitives library, there is only one area displayed by default. If you have selected the Settings library, there are nine areas displayed by default. If you have selected the Shanks (3mm Setting) library, there are nine areas displayed by default. 4. Click on the button representing the component that you want to add to the project to display its associated settings. If you select a component from the Boss library, there are no additional settings. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 75

82 If you select a component from the Primitives library, the Component Name, Diameter and Height boxes are typically displayed. If you select a component from the Settings library, the Component Name, Length and Width boxes are typically displayed. If you select a component from the Shanks (3mm Setting) library, the Name, Diameter and Width boxes are typically displayed alongside the Standard and Size list boxes. If you want to select a different component, click on the icon and repeat the previous step. 5. If you want to edit the name of the component and its associated dimensions, type the appropriate values in the available boxes or select the relevant options from the available list boxes. 6. Click on the Import button to add the items associated with the component to the project. 7. Click on the expand icon beside the selected Root Assembly or assembly in the Project Tree to display its associated items. The items associated with the imported component are located directly beneath the selected assembly. An imported boss, primitive or shank typically comprises a single assembly and an associated replica mesh. An imported setting typically comprises one or more assemblies, each with their own associated replica mesh and a gem. Each of the items associated with the imported component are visible in the 3D View window by default. 8. Click on the icon to close the Component Library settings. Copying and Pasting an Assembly You can create a copy of any assembly and paste it elsewhere in the Project Tree. To copy and paste an assembly: 1. Right-click on the Root Assembly or the assembly in the Project Tree that you want to duplicate to display its context-menu, then click on the Copy menu option to place a copy of the selected assembly on the ArtCAM clipboard. 76 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

83 When you copy an assembly, all of its associated assemblies and replica meshes are copied simultaneously. If you can see the expand icon beside the name of the assembly you want to copy, this indicates that there are one or more other associated assemblies that will also be copied to the ArtCAM clipboard. 2. Right-click on the assembly in the Project Tree beneath which you want to associate the assembly on the ArtCAM clipboard to display its context-menu, then click on the Paste menu option to paste a duplicate copy of the assembly and all of its associated items from the ArtCAM clipboard to the Project Tree directly beneath the selected assembly. A progress bar is displayed in the status bar area during the pasting process: Each time the assembly is pasted from the ArtCAM clipboard the resulting copy adopts the name of the original and is numbered sequentially. You might want to change the name of the copy so that it can easily be distinguished from the original. Right-click on the duplicate assembly to display its context-menu, click on the Rename menu option and then type the new name that you want to give to the assembly. For details, Renaming an Item (on page 26). Block Copying an Assembly You can create multiple copies of the Root Assembly and any of the assembly items in the Project Tree in a grid format. To create a block of copies in a grid format: 1. Click to select the assembly in the Project Tree of which you want to create a block of copies in a grid format. Its name is shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 2. Click on the Block Copy button in the Tools area to display its settings. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 77

84 The name of the assembly in the Project Tree that you are copying is shown in the splitter bar. For example, Block Copy - Root Assembly. 3. In the Transform Relative To area, select the origin you want to use when copying and pasting the assembly: If you want to copy and paste the assembly relative to the origin of the Root Assembly, select the World Centre option by clicking on its radio button. This method is selected by default. If you want to copy and paste the assembly relative to its own origin, select the Component Centre by clicking on its radio button. 4. In the Tangent Plane area, select the axes along which you want to paste the resulting rows and columns of copies: If you want to paste rows along the X-axis and columns along the Y-axis, select the X-Y Plane option by clicking on its radio button. If you want to paste rows along the Y-axis and columns along the Z-axis, select the Y-Z Plane option by clicking on its radio button. If you want to paste rows along the Z-axis and columns along the X-axis, select the Z-X Plane option by clicking on its radio button. The options in the Tangent Plane area are colour coordinated with the origin gnomen shown in the 3D View window. This makes it easier to visualize the direction in which the resulting rows and columns of copies are pasted. 5. If you want to paste the rows of copies in the opposite direction, make sure that the Reverse row direction option is selected. The default direction in which the resulting rows and columns are pasted depends on whether a positive or negative value is used when defining the offset distance. 6. If you want to paste the columns of copies in the opposite direction, make sure that the Reverse column direction option is selected. 7. In the Shape of surface to paste along area, select the shape along which you want to paste the rows and columns of copies: 78 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

85 If you want to paste the copies along a flat surface, select the Plane option by clicking on its radio button. If you want to paste the copies around a cylindrical surface, select the Cylinder option by clicking on its radio button. If you want to past the copies around a spherical surface, select the Sphere option by clicking on its radio button. 8. Define the distance that you want to set between each copy in the Offset box. You can use either a positive or negative value when defining the offset distance. When using a positive value, the resulting copies are pasted in a clockwise direction around a cylindrical or spherical surface, and forwards along a flat surface. When using a negative value, the resulting copies are pasted in an anti-clockwise direction around a cylindrical or spherical surface, and backwards along a flat surface. 9. Define the total number of rows of copies that you want to paste in the Number of Rows box. 10. Define the total number of rows of columns that you want to paste in the Number of Columns box. 11. If you want to keep the original assembly item and store each of the resulting copies as a new assembly item in the Project Tree, make sure that the Nest inside new assembly option is selected. 12. Click on the Accept button to copy and paste the assembly according to the settings. You can click on the settings. icon or the Back button to close the Rotate Copying an Assembly You can create multiple copies of the Root Assembly and any of the assembly items in the Project Tree in a circular pattern by defining a rotation centre. To create several copies of an assembly in a circular pattern by defining a rotation centre: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 79

86 1. Click to select the assembly in the Project Tree of which you want to create a block of copies in a grid format. Its name is shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 2. Click on the Copy Rotate button in the Tools area to display its settings. The name of the assembly in the Project Tree that you are copying is shown in the splitter bar. For example, Copy Rotate - Root Assembly. 3. In the Transform Relative To area, select the origin you want to use when copying and pasting the assembly: If you want to copy and paste the assembly relative to the origin of the Root Assembly, select the World Centre option by clicking on its radio button. This method is selected by default. If you want to copy and paste the assembly relative to its own origin, select the Component Centre by clicking on its radio button. 4. Select the axis around which you want to rotate the assembly by clicking on the appropriate Axis of rotation radio button. 5. Select how each of the copies are rotated by clicking on either of the Angle radio buttons: If you want to rotate each subsequent copy of the assembly by a specified angle, select the Incremental option by clicking on its radio button. If you want to rotate each copy of the assembly evenly within a specified angle, select the Total option by clicking on its radio button. 6. Define the angle of rotation in the degrees box. Type a positive value in the degrees box to copy rotate the assembly in a clockwise direction. Type a negative value to copy rotate the assembly in an anti-clockwise direction. 7. Define the total number of copies that you want to paste in the Number of Copies box. 80 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

87 8. If you want to keep the original assembly item and store each of the resulting copies as a new assembly item in the Project Tree, make sure that the Nest inside new assembly option is selected. 9. Click on the Accept button to copy and paste the assembly according to the settings. 10. Click on the icon to close the settings. Creating a Relief from an Assembly You can create a relief from any assembly item in the Project Tree, whether or not an ArtCAM model is already part of the project. This method is near equivalent to using the Combine Master button previously found in the General Tools area of the JewelSmith tab in ArtCAM JewelSmith 9.1. The only significant difference is that where ArtCAM JewelSmith 9.1 would merge the top and bottom of all visible replica meshes associated with the Master Model with the selected relief layer on the front and back layer stacks in the ArtCAM model respectively, ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 creates a new relief layer from each of the visible replica meshes associated with the chosen assembly item on each of the layer stacks. To create a relief layer from an assembly: 1. Right-click on the Root Assembly or assembly from which you want to create a relief to display its context-menu, then click on the Create Relief menu option. If there are no replica meshes associated with the selected assembly item or the associated replica meshes are not visible in the Project Tree, the Create Relief menu option is greyed-out. A set of two relief layers is created for each of the visible replica meshes in the Project Tree beneath the selected assembly. If there is no model currently open in which to create these relief layers, a new model is created in the Project Tree first. The model adopts the name of the selected assembly. You can set the resolution of the resulting model using the ArtCAM Options page. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 81

88 The highest triangle in each visible replica mesh is converted into a new relief layer at the top of the layer stack that builds the composite relief representing the front surface of the piece, while the lowest triangle in each visible replica mesh is converted into a new relief layer at the top of the layer stack that builds the composite relief representing its back surface. A border equal to 10% of the bounding box that surrounds all of the visible replica meshes in the Project Tree beneath the selected assembly is applied during the relief creation process. Both of the relief layers adopt the name of the selected assembly, with the Top suffix applied to the layer associated with the front surface of the piece, and the Bottom suffix applied to the layer associated with its back surface. Each of the layers is visible. The Merge High relief combine mode is applied to the layer associated with the front surface of the piece by default. The Merge Low relief combine mode is applied to the layer associated with the back surface of the piece by default. If you want to reproduce the results of using the Subtract Master button in ArtCAM JewelSmith 9.1, hide or delete the new relief layer from the layer stack associated with the front surface of the piece, click on the Reliefs list box followed by the Back Relief option, click to select the new relief layer from the layer stack associated with the back surface of the piece, and then click on the Transfer Opposite Side button to transfer the relief layer to the layer stack associated with the back surface of the piece. Click on the Reliefs list box followed by the Front Relief option to return to the layer stack associated with the front surface of the piece. Since the transferred relief layer has the Merge Low relief combine mode applied by default, it is not necessary to change this. Creating a Rotary Relief from an Assembly You can create a rotary relief from any assembly item in the Project Tree, whether or not an ArtCAM model is already part of the project. ArtCAM JewelSmith creates the rotary relief from all visible replica meshes in the Project Tree associated with the selected assembly. To create a rotary relief from an assembly: 82 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

89 1. Make sure that all of the replica meshes in the Project Tree associated with the assembly from which you want to create a rotary relief are visible. For details, see Toggling the Display of an Item (on page 25). 2. Right-click on the Root Assembly or assembly from which you want to create a rotary relief to display its context-menu, and then click on the Create Rotary Relief menu option. If there are no replica meshes associated with the assembly or the associated replica meshes are not visible in the Project Tree, the Create Rotary Relief menu option is greyed-out. If the group of visible replica meshes is found to contain an innerdiameter and is currently aligned with either the Y or Z-axis, a message box is displayed confirming that the group of replica meshes is recognised as ring and asking if you want to align the resulting rotary relief with the X-axis of the model: If you want to align the resulting rotary relief with the X-axis of the model, click on the Yes button to close the message box and continue with the relief creation process. If the group of replica meshes is not actually a ring or you do not want to reposition the resulting rotary relief, click on the No button to close the message box and continue with the relief creation process using the current orientation. If you no longer want to create a rotary relief from the group of replica meshes, click on the Cancel button. A set of two relief layers is created from the group of replica meshes. If a flat model is currently open or there is no model currently open in which to create these relief layers, a new model is created in the Project Tree first. The model adopts the name of the assembly from which the rotary relief is being created. You can set the resolution of the model resulting from the replica mesh using the ArtCAM Options page. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 83

90 The highest triangle in the group of replica meshes is converted into a new relief layer at the top of the layer stack that builds the composite relief representing the front surface of the piece, while the lowest triangle in the group of replica meshes is converted into a new relief layer at the top of the layer stack that builds the composite relief representing its back surface. Where there is a distinguishable inner-diameter in the group of replica meshes, ArtCAM JewelSmith creates a rotary relief in which the X dimension is equal to the inner radius and the Y dimension is equal to three times the width of the ArtCAM model containing the ring. Where there is no clear inner-diameter in the group of replica meshes, ArtCAM JewelSmith creates a rotary relief in which the X dimension is equal to the outer radius and the Y dimension is equal to the width of the ArtCAM model plus a border equivalent to 10% of its original size. The base height is equivalent to the radius of closest point to the world centre. Both of the relief layers adopt the name of the assembly from which the rotary relief is being created, with the Top suffix applied to the layer associated with the front surface of the piece, and the Bottom suffix applied to the layer associated with its back surface. Each of the layers is visible. The Merge High relief combine mode is applied to the layer associated with the front surface of the piece by default. The Merge Low relief combine mode is applied to the layer associated with the back surface of the piece by default. Mirroring an Assembly You can mirror the Root Assembly or any assembly in the Project Tree. You can either mirror the assembly along any of the three axes, or around its own origin. To mirror an assembly: 1. Click to select the assembly in the Project Tree that you want to mirror. Its name is shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 2. Click on the Mirror button in the Tools area to display its settings. 84 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

91 The name of the assembly in the Project Tree that you are mirroring is shown in the splitter bar. For example, Mirror - Root Assembly. 3. In the Transform Relative To area, select the origin you want to use when mirroring the assembly: If you want to mirror the assembly relative to the X=0, Y=0, Z=0 origin, select the World Centre option by clicking on its radio button. This method is selected by default. If you want to mirror the assembly relative to its own origin, select the Component Centre option by clicking on its radio button. 4. If you want to mirror the assembly from the X to Y plane, select the Mirror X-Y option by clicking on its radio button. 5. If you want to mirror the assembly from the Y to Z plane, select the Mirror Y-Z option by clicking on its radio button. 6. If you want to mirror the assembly from the Z to X plane, select the Mirror Z-X option by clicking on its radio button. 7. If you want to keep the original assembly and create the mirrored assembly as a new assembly in the Project Tree, make sure that the Copy option is selected. 8. Click on the Apply button to mirror the assembly. 9. Click on the icon to close the settings. Importing an Assembly You can import an ArtCAM Project (*.3dp) or Assembly File (*.3da) into the Project Tree as an assembly. To import an assembly: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 85

92 1. Right-click on the Root Assembly or assembly in the Project Tree beneath which you want to import another assembly to display its context-menu, then click on the Import menu option to display the Import 3D Model dialog box: 2. Click on the Look in list box and select the folder on your computer in which the assembly that you want to import is stored. The All Supported Files option is selected by default. 3. Click on the name of the assembly that you want to import. Its name is displayed in the File name box. 4. Click on the Open button to import the selected assembly into ArtCAM JewelSmith. A progress bar is displayed during the import process: 5. Click on the expand icon beside the selected Root Assembly or assembly in the Project Tree to display its associated items. The imported assembly and all of its associated items are located directly beneath the selected assembly. Exporting an Assembly You can export the Root Assembly or an assembly from the Project Tree as an ArtCAM Assembly (*.3da), Binary STL (*.stl), ASCII STL (*.stl), Wavefront Object (*.obj) or Delcam Machining Triangles (*.dmt) file. To export an assembly: 86 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

93 1. Right-click on the Root Assembly or assembly in the Project Tree that you want to export to display its context-menu, then click on the Export... menu option to display the Export Assembly As dialog box: 2. Click on the Save in list box and select the folder on your computer in which you want to save the assembly. 3. Type a name for the assembly in the File name box. 4. Click on the Save as type list box, followed by the file type in which you want to save the assembly. You can export an assembly as an ArtCAM Assembly (*.3da), Binary STL (*.stl), ASCII STL (*.stl), Wavefront Object (*.obj) or Delcam Machining Triangles (*.dmt) file only. 5. Click on the Save button to close the dialog box and save the assembly file. Deleting an Assembly You can delete any assembly from the Project Tree, other than the Root Assembly. To delete an assembly: 1. Right-click on the assembly that you want to delete from the Project Tree to display its context-menu, and then click on the Delete menu option. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 87

94 You cannot delete the Root Assembly Tree. from the Project When you delete an assembly, all of its associated assemblies and replica meshes are deleted simultaneously. If you can see the expand icon beside the name of the assembly you want to delete, this indicates that there are one or more other associated assemblies that will also be deleted. Viewing the Attributes of an Assembly You can view details about an assembly including its position relative to the world centre, the size of its bounding box relative to the world centre, its volume, material and weight. You can also edit many of these attributes. To display the attributes of an assembly: 1. Click to select the Root Assembly or the assembly in the Project Tree for which you want to view its attributes. Its name is now shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 2. Click on the Edit Object Attributes button in the Properties area to display its attributes. All of the attributes shown on the page can be edited, except for the following: The nearest point to the centre. This value is the distance to the closest point on the selected assembly, or any of its associated visible replica meshes and assemblies, from the world centre. This is useful for calculating the radius of a rotary shank when it is aligned with the world centre. The value shown in brackets is twice that of the calculated nearest distance; equal to the diameter of the rotary shank when aligned with the world centre. If the selected assembly and all of its associated replica meshes and assemblies are not currently visible, the value is displayed as None. The width (X), length (Y) and height (Z). 88 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

95 These values are the dimensions of the bounding box surrounding the selected assembly and all of its associated replica meshes and assemblies, irrespective of their visibility, relative to the world centre. The Width (X), Length (Y) and Height (Z) values are colour co-ordinated with the origin gnomen displayed in the 3D View window. This makes it easier to visualize the dimensions of the bounding box. The volume of the assembly, as shown in mm³. 3. The given weight of the assembly is controlled by the material and units of measurement currently selected. This value is updated if either the material or units of measurement are changed. If you want to change the material used for the assembly: Click on the Material list box, followed by the material in which it will eventually be cast. Gold (9ct) is selected by default. If you want to calculate the volume of the assembly whilst compensating for any shrinkage that you would expect to occur during the casting process: Define the percentage of the assembly's original volume by which you expect it to reduce during the casting process in the Shrinkage box. No shrinkage value is applied by default. If you want to change the units of measurement in which the assembly is weighed: Click on the Weight list box, followed by the unit of measurement that you want to use. Metric (g) is selected by default. 4. If the assembly was created from an imported sliced triangle mesh originally created in JewelCAD, click to select the Contains JewelCAD Sliced STL option. 5. Click on the icon in the control bar beneath the splitter bar to apply any changes that you have made and close the settings. Adjusting the Material Settings You can shade the Root Assembly and any of the assemblies in the Project Tree. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 89

96 When shading the Root Assembly, you can render the item in the material in which you intend for it to be cast, apply a background image to the 3D View window and adjust the light settings. When shading an assembly, you can adopt the shading settings applied to the Root Assembly or choose to render it in a different material altogether. However, you cannot adjust the background image or light settings. To shade the Root Assembly or an assembly : 1. Click to select the assembly in the Project Tree that you want to shade. Its name is shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 2. Click on the Edit Object Shading button in the Properties area to display its settings. The name of the item in the Project Tree that you are shading is shown in the splitter bar. For example, Material - New Assembly. 3. Click on the Shading Setup list box, followed by the option for the material in which you intend to machine your design. If you are shading an assembly and want to use the same settings currently applied to the assembly in the level above in the Project Tree, click to select the From Parent option. 4. Click on the Background list box, followed by the option for the background image that you want to apply to the 3D View window. If you are shading an assembly, this setting is not available. 5. If you want to adjust the level of ambient light applied to the assembly item, you can either: Click and drag on the slider. Drag to the left to reduce the light, and drag to the right to increase the light; or Define the strength in the box to the right of the slider. If you are shading an assembly, this setting is not available. 6. Click on the icon in the control bar beneath the splitter bar to close the settings. 90 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

97 Adding a Gem to an Assembly You can add a gem to an existing assembly. To add a gem to the Root Assembly or an assembly : 1. Click to select the Root Assembly or the assembly in the Project Tree to which you want to add a gem setting. Its name is now shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 2. Click on the Add Gem button in the Tools area to display options for each available shape of gemstone. 3. Define the shape of the gemstone you want to add to the assembly by clicking on the appropriate button. There is a choice of twelve shapes. 4. Click on the Standard list box, and then on the standard that you want to use. Hexagon, Triangle and Trillion shapes do not have a Standard size setting. You must define the Length, Width and Depth for each of these particular gemstones. If you select the Custom option, the Size list box is greyed-out. You must define the Length, Width and Depth of the gemstone using the boxes on the page. If you select the Carat option, the Length, Width and Depth boxes are updated according to the size of the gemstone you define using the Size list box. 5. Click on the Next button to display the colour options available for the gemstone. 6. Set the colour of the gemstone by clicking on the appropriate button. 7. Type a name for the gem in the Gem name box. The default name for a gem includes the name of the selected assembly followed by the chosen shape of gemstone, and finally the Gem suffix. For example, AssemblyBoxRadiantGem. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 91

98 8. Click on the Next button to add the gem to the Project Tree. Creating an Assembly Silhouette You can create a vector outline of all assemblies and their associated replica meshes currently visible in the 3D View window. This vector outline, referred to as an Assembly Silhouette, is drawn in the model that is currently open. If there is a Reference Silhouette in the model, the resulting Assembly Silhouette is drawn around this and can then be used to create a shank relief that meets gem settings exactly. If there is no Reference Silhouette in the model, the resulting Assembly Silhouette is drawn about the origin of the model. To create an Assembly Silhouette: 1. Make sure that the model in which you want to create the Assembly Silhouette is open. For details, see Opening an Existing Model (on page 58). 2. Make sure that all of the assemblies and their associated replica meshes around which you want to create a vector outline are visible in the Project Tree; and so are shown in the 3D View window. For details, see Toggling the Display of an Item (on page 25). 3. Click to select the Root Assembly in the Project Tree. Its name is now shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. There must be at least one assembly along with at least one of its associated replica meshes visible in order to create the Assembly Silhouette. 4. Make sure that the vector layer on which you want to draw the Assembly Silhouette is selected. 5. Click on the Create Assembly Silhouette button in the Tools area to create a vector outline of all visible assemblies and each of their associated visible replica meshes. 92 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

99 If there are no visible assemblies beneath the Root Assembly, a message box is displayed warning that an assembly must be visible: Click on the OK button to close the message box. A progress bar is displayed in the status bar area during the calculation process: The vector artwork is grouped by default. Creating a Movie You can capture a sequence of images of the finished jewellery design. Prospective customers prior to manufacture can either view these images individually or as a movie. To create a movie: 1. Make sure that all of the items that you want to include in your movie are visible in the 3D View window. For details, see Toggling the Display of an Item (on page 25). 2. Click to select the Root Assembly in the Project Tree. Its name is now shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 3. Click on the Movie Wizard button in the Tools area to display its settings on the page. 4. Type the name you want to give to the movie in the Name box. It is named Root Assembly by default. 5. If you do not want to compress the size of the image files that make up the movie, click to deselect the Compress Images option. This option is selected by default. 6. Select how you want to use the captured images of your jewellery design. If you want to be able to present the images in sequence: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 93

100 First select the Viewer option by clicking on its radio button to display its associated settings. Next define the number of images of the design that you want to capture on each of the three axes in the Frames box. The total number of images is shown below. 7. If you want to view the images in sequence after they have been captured, select the Display Once Created option by clicking on its radio button. This option is deselected by default. 8. If you want to capture a sequence of images only: First select the Images Only option by clicking on its radio button to display its associated settings. Next define the number of images of the design that you want to capture on an axis in the Frames box. 9. Click to select or deselect the option for each of the three axes from which you want to capture images. Only the Z-axis option is selected by default. 10. Make sure that nothing is obstructing the 3D View window; otherwise unwanted objects will be included in your movie. The size of the captured frames is equal to the current size of the 3D View window, so adjust its size accordingly before moving to the next step. 94 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

101 11. Click on the Accept button to display the Browse For Folder dialog box: 12. If you want to create a new folder for the movie: First select the folder or directory on your computer in which you want to create the new folder. Now click on the Make New Folder button to create a new folder. It is named New Folder by default. If you want to rename the new folder, click to select the folder, right-click to display its context-menu and then click on the Rename option. Type the name that you want to give to the folder. 13. Click to select the folder in which you want to create the movie. 14. Click on the OK button to close the Browse For Folder dialog box and capture the movie images. A progress bar is displayed in the status indicating the progress ArtCAM JewelSmith is making in capturing the images that make up the movie: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 95

102 A new folder named Movie is created in the chosen location. The Movie folder contains a sub-folder named according to that which you have given your movie. In this sub-folder is yet another folder named Images. This contains several JPEG image files (*.jpg) numbered sequentially. For example, RootAssembly_0.jpg and so on. 15. Click on the icon in the control bar beneath the splitter bar to close the settings. Using the Object Viewer If you have selected the Viewer option when creating a movie, an HTML file is created in the folder named according to that which you have given the movie. The HTML file also assumes the name that you have given the movie. Double-clicking on this HTML file displays the ArtCAM JewelSmith Object Viewer window, which allows you to view the JPEG image files located within the Images folder either individually or in sequence. The ArtCAM JewelSmith Object Viewer window is displayed immediately after the calculation process providing that the Display Once Created option is selected in the movie settings.. You can use the arrow diagram at the bottom of the window to view your design at specific positions: Each click on the by 45 degrees. arrow moves the design up along the Y-axis Each click on the arrow moves the design down along the Y- axis by 45 degrees. Each click on the by 45 degrees. arrow moves the design left along the X-axis Each click on the arrow moves the design right along the X- axis by 45 degrees. If you want to view all of the captured images of your piece in sequence, click on the Spin button. If you want to cancel the sequence at any time, click on the Stop button. You can compress the HTML file and its associated JPEG image files that make up your movie into a single file, so that it is ready to be sent to a prospective customer via 96 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

103 1. Click on the File > Save As... option to display the Save Webpage dialog box: 2. Click on the Save in list box and then select the location on your computer in which you want to save the compressed movie. 3. If you want to change the name given to the compressed movie, type its new name in the File name box. 4. Click on the Save as type list box, and then on the Web Archive, single file (*.mht) option. 5. Click on the Save button to close the dialog box and save the compressed movie. The compressed movie is saved as an.mht file, and this is the single file that should be sent to the prospective customer via . Using the Multi-Sided Machining Wizard Prior to using the Multi-Sided Machining tool you must first create the toolpaths you want to use to machine your piece, and then save each of them as a toolpath template. For details, see Creating a Template in the Machining Models section of the ArtCAM JewelSmith Reference Help. 1. Make sure that all of the items that you want to machine are visible in the 3D View window. For details, see Toggling the Display of an Item (on page 25). What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 97

104 2. Click to select the Root Assembly in the Project Tree. Its name is now shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 3. Click on the 3D Machining Wizard button in the Tools area to display the Multi-Sided Machining page on the Machining tab. If you have not saved the current model in which you are working prior to using the Multi-Sided Machining tool, a message box is displayed asking if you want to update the project with your changes: If you want to save the changes made to the model, click on the Yes button. Otherwise, click on the No button. For further information, see Closing a Model (on page 67). You can see details of the model dimensions, toolpath template and post-processor that will currently be used, as well as both the number and dimensions of the bridges and/or tabs used to hold the piece in position, during the machining process. Six bridges, each with a thickness of 0.5 mm and a width of 2 mm, or four tabs each with a height of 1 mm and a width of 1 mm are used by default. Whether the Flat Model or Ring Model settings are displayed on the page depends on if this is your first time using the Multi-Sided Machining tool, or, if not, the type of model that was previously defined when it was used last. If this is your first time using the Multi-Sided Machining tool, a Flat Model type, the 2D HPGL (*.plt) post-processor and the MMBlue.tpl toolpath template, based on the use of a 10 degree Conical tool, are selected as the default machining settings. 98 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

105 If you have used the Multi-Sided Machining tool before, ArtCAM JewelSmith recalls the specific machining settings that were defined for your previous Flat or Ring Model job, including your chosen post-processor(s) and toolpath template file(s). 4. Define the location in which you want ArtCAM JewelSmith to store the files resulting from the toolpath calculation process: First click on the Browse... button in the Machining Output Folder area to display the Browse For Folder dialog box: If you have not previously defined the location of the machining output folder on your computer, the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\ArtCAM Files\Models folder is selected by default. Next click to select the folder in which you want to store the output files. Now click on the OK button to close the Browse For Folder dialog box. The location of the folder is displayed on the Machining Output Folder box. 5. If you want to add a specific prefix to the output files, type this in the Output prefix box. The name of the current project is used as the prefix by default. For example, (Untitled) where the project has not yet been saved. 6. Make sure that the dimensions of the item of jewellery shown in the Model Dimensions area are correct, and that you have a large enough block of material available. 7. Make sure that the toolpath template file(s) and post-processor(s) shown in the Current Templates area are those which you want to use. 8. Make sure that the number of bridges and/or tabs and their respective dimensions shown in the Supports area are correct. 9. If you want to calculate the toolpaths needed to machine your item of jewellery now, make sure that the Calculate Toolpaths option is selected. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 99

106 If you want ArtCAM JewelSmith to create the ArtCAM model files needed to machine the item of jewellery without actually calculating any associated toolpaths, make sure that the Calculate Toolpaths option is deselected. This gives you the freedom to develop the resulting model files before proceeding with the toolpath calculation process. 10. If you need to edit any of the machining settings shown on the page, click on the Edit Settings button to display the Model Type settings page: If you are machining a flat item of jewellery, see Machining Flat Work (on page 100) for details. If you are machining a ring, see Machining Rings (on page 103) for details. 11. Click on the Accept button to begin the toolpath calculation process. When the toolpath calculation process is complete, a message box is displayed confirming that a new folder named Machining has been created in the JewelSmith Project directory. In this Machining folder, the toolpath files needed to machine the item of jewellery are found. Click on the OK button to close the message box and return to the Project tab. Each of the new models created by the Multi-Sided Machining tool during the toolpath calculation process are listed beneath the Models folder in the Project Tree. If you want to open any of these model files, see Opening an Existing Model (on page 58). Machining Flat Work If you are machining a flat item of jewellery: 1. Make sure that all of the items that you want to machine are visible in the 3D View window. For details, see Toggling the Display of an Item (on page 25). 2. Click to select the Root Assembly in the Project Tree. Its name is now shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 100 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

107 3. Click on the 3D Machining Wizard button in the Tools area to display the Multi-Sided Machining page on the Machining tab. 4. Click on the Edit Settings button to display the Model Type settings page. 5. Make sure that the Flat option is selected by clicking on its radio button. 6. Click on the Next button to display the Model Size settings page. 7. Define the diameter of the piece in the Diameter box. 8. Define the resolution of the model in the Resolution box. A default resolution of 30 pix/mm is used, and this is suitable for almost any flat design. 9. Click on the Next button to display the Gender settings page. 10. Define the kind of piece it is that you want to machine: If you want to machine the actual piece, make sure that the Flip-Machine Solid (Male) option is selected by clicking on its radio button. If you want to make a mould from which the piece can be machined, make sure that the Flip-Machine Mould (Female) option is selected by clicking on its radio button. 11. Click on the Next button to display the Material Block/Positioning settings page. A wireframe representation of the block of material is shown in the 3D View window by default. 12. Define the dimensions of the block of material that you are using in the Material Thickness, Material Length and Material Width boxes. Setting the size of the block of material does not physically alter the size of the piece that you want to machine. 13. If you want to align the centre of all visible items in the Project Tree with the centre of the block of material, click on the Centre in material button. 14. If you want to scale the piece relative to the block of material: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 101

108 If you want to preserve the aspect ratio when scaling the piece make sure that the Keep aspect ratio option is selected. If you want to limit the area of the block of material occupied by the scaled piece, define the amount of material that you want to leave around the piece in the Scale to within box. Click on the Scale to fit button to scale the piece according to the dimensions of the block of material and the scaling settings that you have defined. If you want to restore the original dimensions of each of the visible items in the Project Tree, click on the Restore Assembly button. 15. Click on the Next button to display the Templates & Supports settings page. The Flat Template settings are shown. The MMBlue.tpl toolpath template is selected by default if you are using a Flat Template for the first time. The default toolpath template files are located in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\ArtCAM Files\Toolpath Templates folder on your computer. To associate a different toolpath template with the Flat Template: Click on the Select... button to display the Select Toolpath Template dialog box. Click on the Look in list box followed by the folder on your computer in which the template file (*.tpl) that you want to use is stored. 102 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

109 Once you have found the template file, click on its file name. Its name is displayed in the File name box. Click on the Open button to import the template file and close the dialog box. Its name is displayed on the Templates & Supports settings page. The 2D HPGL (*.plt) post-processor is selected by default. To select an alternative post-processor: Click on the Post Processor list box, followed by the type of post-processor that you want to use for your CNC machine. To use supports during the machining process: In the Bridges area, define the number of bridges that you want to create to hold the piece in position during the machining process in the Number box, and then define the dimensions of each bridge in the Width and Thickness boxes. 16. Click on the Next button to return to the first Multi-Sided Machining page. The machining settings are displayed in the Flat Model area of the page. Machining Rings If you are machining a ring: 1. Make sure that all of the items that you want to machine are visible in the 3D View window. For details, see Toggling the Display of an Item (on page 25). 2. Click to select the Root Assembly in the Project Tree. Its name is now shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 3. Click on the 3D Machining Wizard button in the Tools area to display the Multi-Sided Machining page on the Machining tab. 4. Click on the Edit Settings button to display the Model Type settings page. 5. Make sure that the Ring option is selected by clicking on its radio button. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 103

110 6. Click on the Next button to display the Model Size settings page. 7. Define the diameter of the ring in the Diameter box. 8. Define the resolution of the model in the Resolution box. A default resolution of 30 pix/mm is used, and this is suitable for almost any ring design. 9. Click on the Next button to display the Machining Orientations settings page. 10. Click to select the machining orientation option(s) that you want to use when machining the ring: If you want to use three-axis machining, make sure that the Three-Axis option is selected. If you want to use rotary-axis machining, make sure that the Rotary-Axis option is selected. If you want to use inside machining, make sure that the Inside option is selected. If you want to use index machining, make sure that the Indexed option is selected. 11. Click on the Next button to display the Templates & Supports settings page. The settings shown on the page depend on the machining orientation(s) that you have chosen. 12. Whether you choose the Three Axis, Rotary Axis, Inside or Indexed machining orientation(s), for each selected orientation you must assign a toolpath template. Typically, both a Three Axis and Rotary Axis orientation are used when machining a ring. The MMBlue.tpl toolpath template is selected by default if you are using a Three Axis orientation for the first time. The MMBlue-Pockets.tpl toolpath template is selected by default if you are using a Rotary Axis orientation for the first time. The Internal.tpl toolpath template is selected by default if you are using an Inside orientation for the first time. 104 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

111 The MMBlue.tpl toolpath template is selected by default if you are using an Indexed orientation for the first time. The default toolpath template files are located in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\ArtCAM Files\Toolpath Templates folder on your computer. To associate a different toolpath template with a particular machining orientation: Click on the Select... button to display the Select Toolpath Template dialog box. Click on the Look in list box and select the folder on your computer in which the template file (*.tpl) that you want to use is stored. Once you have found the template file, click on its file name. Its name is displayed in the File name box. Click on the Open button to import the template file and close the dialog box. Its name is displayed on the Templates & Supports settings page. The 2D HPGL (*.plt) post-processor is selected by default for each orientation. To select an alternative post-processor for a particular machining orientation: Click on the Post Processor list box, followed by the type of post-processor that you want to use for your CNC machine. To use supports during the machining process: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 105

112 In the Bridges area, define the number of bridges that you want to create to hold the piece in position during the machining process in the Number box, and then define the dimensions of each bridge in the Width and Thickness box. If you are only using an Indexed template, there are tab settings rather than bridge settings on the page. If you are using a combination of orientations, you must define the tab settings for the Indexed template and the bridge settings for the Three Axis, Rotary Axis and/or Inside template(s). The bridge settings are applied to the Three Axis, Rotary Axis and/or Inside template(s) only and the tab settings are applied to the Indexed template only. 13. Customise the remaining settings for the machining orientation(s) as required: If you are using a Three Axis Template: Click to deselect the Remove Negative Points option if you do not want ArtCAM JewelSmith to remove all points with a negative Z value. Click to deslect the Machine Both Sides option if you do not want to The Boss.3da file is selected by default. This file is located in the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\ArtCAM Files\Component Libraries\Bosses folder on your computer. If you want to change the boss file used during the machining process: 106 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

113 Click on the Select button in the Boss File area to display the Select Boss Assembly dialog box: Click on the Look in list box followed by the folder in which the ArtCAM Assembly File (*.3da) that you want to use is stored. Once you have found the file, click on its name. Its name is displayed in the File name box. Click on the Open button to import the selected ArtCAM Assembly File (*.3da) and close the dialog box. Its name is displayed on the Templates & Supports settings page. If you are using a Rotary Axis Template: Define the diameter of the jig you are using in the Jig Diameter box to prevent the tool from colliding with the machining jig. If you are using an Inside Template: Click to select the Offset for Bangle option if you want to machine the inner surface of the ring at the top rather than at the bottom when using an Internal Machining Unit (IMU). If you are using an Indexed Template: Define the diameter of the jig you are using in the Jig Diameter box to prevent the tool from colliding with the machining jig. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 107

114 Define the safe distance you want to set around the jig in the Jig Offset box. Define the angle at which the tool begins machines the first step in the Start Angle box. The ring is rotated to this angle on the index machine. Define the angle at which the tool machines the last step in the End Angle box. Define the number of steps in the Number of Steps box. There is no limit to the number of steps you can use, although ArtCAM JewelSmith only displays up to Generally, the number of steps required varies according to the level of detail in the ring. Click to select the Show Toolpath Centers option if you want to display the toolpath centers in the 3D View window. The entry step is shown in green, all intermediate steps are shown in black and the exit step is shown in red. The angle between each of the intermediate steps is equivalent to the start angle divided by the number of steps. Click to select the Add Tabs option if you want to add four tabs around the circumference of the ring. Click to select the Two Tabs option if you want to limit the number of tabs to two. If you want to offset the tabs from the circumference of the ring, define the offset distance in the Tab Offset box. A negative value moves the tabs outwards, while a positive value moves the tabs inwards. If you offset the tabs inwards and the offset distance goes beyond the offset distance that surrounds the jig, the tabs are removed. If you want to reposition the tabs around the circumference of the ring, click and drag on the Tab Rotation slider. Drag the slider to the right if you want to rotate the tabs clockwise, and left if you want to rotate them anti-clockwise. Click to select the Cut Through To Back option if you want to allow ArtCAM JewelSmith to machine past the position of the jig. 108 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

115 You may want to use the Cut Through To Back option when machining hollow pieces or when you are no longer using a jig. A message box is displayed warning that all jig settings are ignored and that ArtCAM JewelSmith will machine through the back surface of the piece. 14. Click on the Next button to return to the first Multi-Sided Machining page. The machining settings are displayed in the Ring Model area of the page. Working With Replica Meshes This section tells you how to work with replica meshes as part of a project. Adding a Replica Mesh to a Project When working on a model within a project, you can add a replica mesh of the composite relief to the Project Tree. To create a triangle mesh and add it to the Project Tree: 1. Click on the Create Triangle Mesh button in the Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home page to display the Mesh Creator page. You can also right-click on an open model in the Project Tree to display its context-menu, and then click on the Create Mesh... option to display the Mesh Creator page. Alternatively, you can click on the Reliefs > Create Triangle Mesh... menu option from the Main Menu bar. 2. Define the name of the assembly that is associated with the triangle mesh whenever it is added to the project in the Assembly Name box. The name of the model is displayed by default. If you are not currently working on a model as part of a project, the Assembly Name box is not displayed. 3. In the Triangulation Parameters area, define the tolerance in the Tolerance box that you want to use to control the number of triangles that are created. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 109

116 If you cannot see the settings in the Triangulation Parameters area, click on the arrow icon to display them. 4. Define if and how a back face is created in the mesh: If you want to create an open mesh, select the Open Mesh option by clicking on its radio button. If you want to close the mesh using the composite relief resulting from the layer stack associated with the back surface of the piece, select the Close with Back Relief option by clicking on its radio button. If you want to close the mesh with a flat plane at the Z zero height, select the Close with a Flat Plane option by clicking on its radio button. If you are creating a triangle mesh from a shank relief resulting from using one of the tools in the New Shanks area, it is recommended that you use this option. For details, see Creating a New Model from a Shank (on page 55). If you want to close the mesh with an inverted copy of the composite relief resulting from the layer stack associated with the front surface of the piece, select the Close with Inverted Front option by clicking on its radio button. If you want to close the mesh with an offset copy of the composite relief resulting from the layer stack associated with the front surface of the piece, select the Close with Offset option by clicking on its radio button and then define its thickness in the Thickness box directly below. 5. If you intend to wrap the resulting mesh around a curved surface: First click to select the Limit Triangles option. Now click on the Triangle Length list box, followed by the option for the axes along which you limit the length of each triangle. If you want to limit the length of each triangle along both the X and Y-axis, click to select the Max Length option. If you want to limit the length of each triangle along the X-axis only, click to select the Max X Length option. If you want to limit the length of each triangle along the Y-axis only, click to select the Max Y Length option. 110 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

117 Next define the maximum length of the side(s) in each triangle in the Tri Side Length box. If the Limit Triangles option is selected and the Tri Side Length is set to zero, a message box is displayed warning that a value greater than zero must be used when limiting triangles: Click on the OK button to close the message box. 6. Click on the Create Triangles button to create the triangle mesh according to your chosen settings. The volume of the triangle mesh and the number of triangles created are shown in the Results area. If there are no relief layers currently visible in the 3D View window, a message box is displayed warning that the triangle mesh has not been generated: Click on the OK button to close the message box. A second message box is displayed warning that the triangle mesh has not been created: Click on the OK button to close the message box. 7. If you want to calculate the approximate weight of the piece after the manufacturing process: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 111

118 If you cannot see the settings in the Properties area, click on the arrow icon to display them. First define the estimated shrinkage in volume as a percentage in the Shrinkage box Next click on the Weight list box, followed by the option for the material in which you intend to manufacture the piece. Now click on the Update button. The volume of the triangle mesh and/or the number of triangles created is updated in the Results area. 8. Click on the Triangle Drawing list box, followed by the option that you want to use when rendering the triangle mesh in the 3D View window: If you cannot see the settings in the Advanced area, click on the arrow icon to display them. If you want to view the triangle mesh as a wireframe image, click to select the Wireframe option. Triangles viewed from the front are shown in blue, while triangles viewed from the back are shown in red. If you want to view the triangle mesh as a shaded image, click to select the Shaded option. The Modelling Default shading options are used, unless you have changed them using the Lights and Material page. 9. If you want to smooth the triangles in the resulting mesh: First make sure that the Smooth Triangles option is selected. Next define the angle of each triangle in the Smooth Angle box. You can also smooth a replica mesh directly from the Project Tree using the Smooth option in the context-menu displayed by right-clicking on a replica mesh. When using this method, an angle of 17 degrees is always used. 10. If you want to add the triangle mesh to the Project Tree: 112 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

119 First click on the Add To Project button. A message box is displayed confirming that the triangle mesh has been added to the project: Click on the OK button to close the message box. A new assembly is created as the last item beneath the Root Assembly, and the replica mesh is directly associated with this. Both the new assembly and the replica mesh adopt the name of the ArtCAM model from which they originate. The Save Triangles..., Copy To Clipboard and Add To Project buttons are greyed-out immediately after the Add To Project has been used. If you want to export the same triangle mesh or copy it to the ArtCAM clipboard after clicking on the Add To Project button, use the contextmenu associated with the replica mesh in the Project Tree. For details, see Exporting a Replica Mesh (on page 122) and Copying and Pasting an Item (on page 29). Next click on the Project tab to display the Project Tree. Now click on the expand icon beside the new assembly in the Project Tree to display its associated replica mesh. If you want to associate the triangle mesh with an existing assembly in the Project Tree: First click on the Copy to Clipboard button. A message box is displayed confirming that the triangle mesh has been copied to the ArtCAM clipboard: Click on the OK button to close the message box. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 113

120 If you are working on a model independently, the Copy to Clipboard button is always greyed-out. Next click on the Project tab to display the Project Tree. Now right-click on the Root Assembly or assembly in the Project Tree beneath which you want to add the replica mesh to display its context-menu, then click on the Paste menu option. For further details, see Copying and Pasting an Item (on page 29). The replica mesh is added directly beneath the selected assembly, and adopts the name of the ArtCAM model from which it originates. 11. If you have added the triangle mesh into the Project Tree, click on the Assistant tab to return to the Mesh Creator page. 12. Click on the Close button to return to the Assistant's Home page. Editing an Associated Model You can open the ArtCAM model in the Project Tree used to create a replica mesh directly from the replica mesh itself, providing that both the model and the replica mesh originate from within the same project. To edit the model associated with a replica mesh: 1. Right-click on the replica mesh in the Project Tree for which you want to edit its associated ArtCAM model to display its context-menu, then click on the Edit Model menu option. The model associated with the replica mesh is opened and the Assistant's Home page is displayed. If you have imported a 3D Assembly (*.3da), ArtCAM Project (*.3dp), 3D Studio (*.3ds), Drawing Interchange (*.dxf), Triangle Mesh (*.stl), Universal 3D (*.u3d), WaveFront Object (*.obj) or Delcam Machining Triangles (*.dmt) file into the project, the Edit Model menu option is greyed-out. You can only edit a model associated with a replica mesh when both originate from within the same project. The original model must still be included as part of the project also. 114 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

121 The model icon in the Project Tree changes from to, indicating that the model associated with the replica mesh is now open. Creating a Relief from the Project Tree You can create a relief from any replica mesh in the Project Tree. To create a relief from a replica mesh: 1. Right-click on the replica mesh in the Project Tree from which you want to create a relief to display its context-menu, then click on the Create Relief menu option. If the replica mesh is not visible in the Project Tree, the Create Relief menu option is greyed-out. A set of two relief layers is created from the replica mesh. If there is no model currently open in which to create these relief layers, a new model is created in the Project Tree first. The model adopts the name of the replica mesh. You can set the resolution of the model resulting from the assembly using the ArtCAM Options page. The highest triangle in the replica mesh is converted into a new relief layer at the top of the layer stack that builds the composite relief representing the front surface of the piece, while the lowest triangle in the replica mesh is converted into a new relief layer at the top of the layer stack that builds the composite relief representing its back surface. A border equal to 10% of the bounding box that surrounds the replica mesh is applied during the relief creation process. Both of the relief layers adopt the name of the replica mesh, with the Top suffix applied to the layer associated with the front surface of the piece, and the Bottom suffix applied to the layer associated with its back surface. Each of the layers is visible. The Merge High relief combine mode is applied to the layer associated with the front surface of the piece by default. The Merge Low relief combine mode is applied to the layer associated with the back surface of the piece by default. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 115

122 Creating a Rotary Relief from a Replica Mesh You can create a rotary relief from any replica mesh in the Project Tree. To create a rotary relief from a replica mesh: 1. Right-click on the replica mesh in the Project Tree from which you want to create a relief to display its context-menu, then click on the Create Rotary Relief menu option. If the replica mesh is not visible in the Project Tree, the Create Rotary Relief menu option is greyed-out. If the replica mesh is found to contain an inner-diameter and is currently aligned with either the Y or Z-axis, a message box is displayed confirming that the replica mesh is recognised as ring and asking if you want to align the resulting rotary relief with the X-axis of the model: If you want to align the resulting rotary relief with the X-axis of the model, click on the Yes button to close the message box and continue with the relief creation process. If the replica mesh is not actually a ring or you do not want to reposition the resulting rotary relief, click on the No button to close the message box and continue with the relief creation process using the current orientation. If you no longer want to create a rotary relief from the replica mesh, click on the Cancel button. A set of two relief layers is created from the replica mesh. If a flat model is currently open or there is no model currently open in which to create these relief layers, a new model is created in the Project Tree first. The model adopts the name of the replica mesh. You can set the resolution of the model resulting from the replica mesh using the ArtCAM Options page. 116 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

123 The highest triangle in the replica mesh is converted into a new relief layer at the top of the layer stack that builds the composite relief representing the front surface of the piece, while the lowest triangle in the replica mesh is converted into a new relief layer at the top of the layer stack that builds the composite relief representing its back surface. Where there is a distinguishable inner-diameter in the replica mesh, ArtCAM JewelSmith creates a rotary relief in which the X dimension is equal to the inner radius and the Y dimension is equal to three times the width of the ArtCAM model containing the ring. Where there is no clear inner-diameter in the replica mesh, ArtCAM JewelSmith creates a rotary relief in which the X dimension is equal to the outer radius and the Y dimension is equal to the width of the ArtCAM model plus a border equivalent to 10% of its original size. The base height is equivalent to the radius of closest point to the world centre. Both of the relief layers adopt the name of the replica mesh, with the Top suffix applied to the layer associated with the front surface of the piece, and the Bottom suffix applied to the layer associated with its back surface. Each of the layers are visible. The Merge High relief combine mode is applied to the to the layer associated with the front surface of the piece by default. The Merge Low relief combine mode is applied to the layer associated with the back surface of the piece by default. Importing a Replica Mesh You can import a triangle or surface model saved in any of the following file formats into the Project Tree as a replica mesh: Triangle Models 3D Studio (*.3ds) Drawing Interchange File (*.dxf) Binary or ASCII STL (*.stl) Universal 3D File (*.u3d) Wavefront Object File (*.obj) Delcam Machining Triangles (*.dmt) Surface Models 3D NURBS Modeller - Rhinoceros (*.3dm) What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 117

124 Delcam DGK (*.dgk) SolidWorks Part File (*.sldprt) IGES Format (*.igs, *.ige and *.iges) ACIS File (*.sat) CATIA File (*.fic) CATIA5 (*.catpart and *.catproduct) Cimatron File (*.pfm) Elite File (*.elt) Ideas File (*.mf1 and *.prt) Inventor File (*.ipt) Parasolid Files (*.x_t, *.xmt_txt, *.x_b and *.xmt_bin) Parts File (*.psmodel) DDX Files (*.ddx and *.ddz) Pro/Engineer Files (*.asm and *.par) SpaceClaim File (*.scdoc) Step Files (*.stp and *.step) Unigraphics File (*.prt) VDAFS File (*.vda) To import a triangle or surface model as a replica mesh: 118 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

125 1. Right-click on the Root Assembly or the assembly in the Project Tree beneath which you want to import a replica mesh to display its context-menu, then click on the Import menu option to display the Import 3D Model dialog box: 2. Click on the Look in list box and select the folder on your computer in which the triangle or surface model that you want to import is stored. Triangle model files are listed in the window by default. 3. Click on the Files of type list box, followed by the option that includes the type of model that you want to import. The All Supported Files option is selected by default. 3D Assembly (*.3da) and ArtCAM Project (*.3dp) files can only be imported into a project as an assembly. If you want to list only the triangle models available in the current folder, click on the Triangle Models (*.3da; *.3dp; *.3ds; *. dxf; *.stl; *.u3d; *.obj; *.dmt) option. If you want to list only the surface models available in the current folder, select the Surface Models (*.3dm; *.dgk; *.sldprt; *.igs; *.ige; *.iges; *.sat; *.fic; *.catpart; *.catproduct; *.pfm; *.elt; *.mf1; *.prt; *.ipt; *.x_t; *.xmt_txt; *.x_b; *.xmt_bin; *.psmodel; *.ddx; *.ddz; *.asm; *.par; *.scdoc; *.stp; *.step; *.prt; *.vda) option. 4. Click on the name of the triangle or surface model that you want to import. Its name is displayed in the File name box. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 119

126 5. Click on the Open button to import the selected triangle or surface model into ArtCAM JewelSmith. A progress bar is displayed in the status bar area during the import process: 6. Click on the expand icon beside the selected Root Assembly or assembly in the Project Tree to display its associated items. The imported replica mesh is located directly beneath the selected assembly. Importing a Replica Mesh from the Component Library You can create a component from the Root Assembly assembly in the Project Tree. or an empty An empty assembly has no associated ArtCAM model file, replica mesh or gem setting. An empty assembly is easily identified in the Project Tree as having no expand or collapse icon beside it. To create a component from an empty assembly: 1. Click to select the Root Assembly or the assembly with which you want to associate a new component. Its name is now shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 2. Click on the Open Mesh Library button in the Libraries area to display the Component Library settings. 3. Click on the Libraries list box, followed by the name of the library for which you want to display its associated components. You can toggle the display of the component thumbnails associated with the selected library. Click on the arrow icon on the library control bar to hide its set of thumbnails currently shown below: 120 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

127 Click on the arrow icon on the library control bar to display its set of thumbnails directly below: 4. Click on the thumbnail image representing the component that you want to add to the Project. 5. If you want to change the name of the component, type its new name in the Component Name box. 6. If you want to control which dimensions are associated with a component and their default values, click on the arrow icon on the Advanced Settings control bar to display its settings. You can specify up to three dimensions for each component. First click on the Dimension list box, followed by the dimension to which you want to assign attributes. The dimensions already associated with a component are shown on the settings page. For example, if you are required to define the diameter and width of the component, two dimensions are already in use. Click to select the Active option to display the attributes associated with the selected dimension. Define the name of the dimension in the Description box. The default description is none. If the component is based on an ArtCAM Assembly File (*.3da), if you define ShankDiameter and/or ShankWidth as the description, the Standard and/or Size list boxes are also displayed in the page of settings when the component is used. Define the default diameter of the component in the Reference Size box. The default size is 1. Make sure that only the options for each of the axes are selected in the Link area. All three axes are linked by default. Now click on the Apply button. 7. Click on the Import button to add the component to the Project Tree. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 121

128 Click on the expand icon beside the Root Assembly in the Project Tree to display its associated items. The imported component is displayed as a new assembly directly beneath the Root Assembly. It is named according to that which was defined when creating the component. Click on the expand icon beside the new assembly in the Project Tree to display its associated items. Click on the expand icon beside the standard and ring size information. The diameter, radius and thickness. For each imported component, at least one replica mesh is associated with the assembly. Further assemblies, replica meshes or gems may also be associated with the imported component. Exporting a Replica Mesh You can export a replica mesh from the Project Tree as an ArtCAM Assembly (*.3da), Binary STL (*.stl), ASCII STL (*.stl), Wavefront Object (*.obj) or Delcam Machining Triangles (*.dmt) file. To export a replica mesh: 1. Right-click on the replica mesh in the Project Tree that you want to export to display its context-menu, then click on the Export... menu option to display the Export Mesh As dialog box: 122 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

129 2. Click on the Save in list box and select the location on your computer in which you want to save the replica mesh. 3. Type a name for the replica mesh in the File name box. 4. Click on the Save as type list box, followed by the file type in which you want to save the replica mesh. You can export a replica mesh as an ArtCAM Assembly (*.3da), Binary STL (*.stl), ASCII STL (*.stl), Wavefront Object (*.obj) or Delcam Machining Triangles (*.dmt) file only. 5. Click on the Save button to close the dialog box and save the replica mesh file. Smoothing a Replica Mesh You can smooth the triangles within an existing replica mesh in the Project Tree. To smooth the triangles within a replica mesh: 1. Right-click on the replica mesh in the Project Tree in which you want to smooth its triangles to display its context-menu, and then click on the Smooth menu option. Reversing a Replica Mesh You can reverse the direction of the triangles within an existing replica mesh in the Project Tree. To reverse the direction of the triangles within a replica mesh: 1. Right-click on the replica mesh in the Project Tree in which you want to reverse its triangles to display its context-menu, and then click on the Reverse menu option. Deleting a Replica Mesh You can delete any replica mesh To delete a replica mesh: from the Project Tree. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 123

130 1. Right-click on the replica mesh that you want to delete to display its context-menu, and then click on the Delete menu option. A message box is displayed asking if you want to delete the replica mesh or not: 2. Click on the Yes button to close the message box and delete the replica mesh from the Project Tree. Working with Gems This section tells you how to work with gems as part of a project. Adding a Gem to an Assembly You can add a gem to an existing assembly. To add a gem to an assembly: 1. Click to select the Root Assembly or the assembly in the Project Tree to which you want to add a gem setting. Its name is now shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 2. Click on the Add Gem button in the Tools area to display options for each available shape of gemstone. 3. Define the shape of the gemstone you want to add to the assembly by clicking on the appropriate button. There is a choice of twelve shapes. 4. Click on the Standard list box, and then on the standard that you want to use. Hexagon, Triangle and Trillion shapes do not have a Standard size setting. You must define the Length, Width and Depth for each of these particular gemstones. 124 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

131 If you select the Custom option, the Size list box is greyed-out. You must define the Length, Width and Depth of the gemstone using the boxes on the page. If you select the Carat option, the Length, Width and Depth boxes are updated according to the size of the gemstone you define using the Size list box. 5. Click on the Next button to display the colour options available for the gemstone. 6. Set the colour of the gemstone by clicking on the appropriate button. 7. Type a name for the gem in the Gem name box. The default name for a gem includes the name of the selected assembly followed by the chosen shape of gemstone, and finally the Gem suffix. For example, AssemblyBoxRadiantGem. 8. Click on the Next button to add the gem to the Project Tree. Editing a Gem's Size and Colour You can change the dimensions and colour of an existing gem. To edit the size and/or colour of a gem: 1. Click to select the expand icon beside the assembly associated with the gem setting that you want to edit. The gem settings associated with the assembly are shown in the Project Tree. 2. Click to select the name of the gem that you want to edit. Its name is now shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 3. Click on the Edit Object Attributes button to display its setting options on the page. 4. If you want to adjust the size of the gem, click on the Standard list box, and then on the standard that you want to use: If you select the Custom option, the Size list box is greyedout. You must define the Length, Width and Depth of the gem using the boxes on the page. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 125

132 If you select the Carat option, the Length, Width and Depth boxes are updated according to the size of the gem you define using the Size list box. 5. If you want to change the colour of the gem, click on the Edit Colour button to display its colour options, and then click on the button for the new colour that you want to use. The new colour is applied to the gem, and providing that the gem is visible it can be seen in the 3D View window. For details, see Toggling the Display of an Item (on page 25). Exporting a Gem You can export a gem as an ArtCAM Assembly (*.3da), Binary STL (*.stl), ASCII STL (*.stl), Wavefront Object (*.obj) or Delcam Machining Triangles (*.dmt) file. To export a gem: 1. Right-click on the gem in the Project Tree that you want to export to display its context-menu, then click on the Export... menu option to display the Export Gem As dialog box: 2. Click on the Save in list box and select the folder on your computer in which you want to save the gem. 3. Type a name for the gem in the File name box. 4. Click on the Save as type list box, followed by the file type in which you want to save the gem. 126 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

133 You can export a gem as an ArtCAM Assembly (*.3da), Binary STL (*.stl), ASCII STL (*.stl), Wavefront Object (*.obj) or Delcam Machining Triangles (*.dmt) file only. 5. Click on the Save button to close the dialog box and save the gem file. Importing a Gem You can import a gem previously saved as an ArtCAM Assembly (*.3da), Binary STL (*.stl), ASCII STL (*.stl), Wavefront Object (*.obj) or Delcam Machining Triangles (*.dmt) file into the Project Tree. If the gem was saved as an ArtCAM Assembly (*.3da) file, it is imported into the Project Tree as an assembly and an associated gem. If the gem was saved as a Binary STL (*.stl), ASCII STL (*.stl), Wavefront Object (*.obj) or Delcam Machining Triangles (*.dmt) file, it is imported into the Project Tree as a replica mesh. To import a gem: 1. Right-click on the Root Assembly or the assembly in the Project Tree into which you want to import the gem to display its context-menu, and then click on the Import... menu option to display the Import 3D Model dialog box: 2. Click on the Look in list box and select the folder on your computer in which the gem that you want to import is stored. The All Supported Files option is selected by default. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 127

134 3. Click on the name of the gem that you want to import. Its name is displayed in the File name box. 4. Click on the Open button to import the selected gem into ArtCAM JewelSmith. A progress bar is displayed during the import process: 5. Click on the exapnd icon beside the selected Root Assembly or assembly in the Project Tree to display its associated items. If you have imported a a gem previously saved as an ArtCAM Assembly (*.3da) file, the resulting gem and its associated assembly are located directly beneath the selected assembly. The new assembly adopts the name of the imported file, and the new gem has the name it was given when originally saved. If you have imported a gem previously saved as a Binary STL (*.stl), ASCII STL (*.stl), Wavefront Object (*.obj) or Delcam Machining Triangles (*.dmt) file, the resulting replica mesh is located directly beneath the selected assembly and adopts the name of the imported file. Deleting a Gem You can delete an existing gem from the Project Tree. To delete a gem: 1. Right-click on the gem that you want to delete from the Project Tree to display its context-menu, then click on the Delete menu option. Using the Nudge Tool You can adjust the position and angle of the Root Assembly, an assembly, replica mesh or gem in the Project Tree. You can centre the item, align the item with the X-axis, move the item along any of the three axes, or rotate the item around a defined origin. To reposition a selected item: 1. Click to select the item in the Project Tree that you want to reposition. Its name is now shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 128 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

135 2. Click on the Nudge button in the Positioning area to display its settings. The name of the item in the Project Tree that you are repositioning is shown in the splitter bar. For example, Nudge - New Assembly. 3. If you want to align the origin of the selected item with the world centre origin, click on the Centre Object button in the Simple Transformations area. 4. If you want to align the centre of the finger-hole within the selected item with the world centre origin during the centring process, make sure that the Find ring centre when centring option is selected. If you have clicked on the Centre Object button with the Find ring centre when centring option checked, but the selected item is not currently aligned with the X-axis, a message box is displayed asking if you want to align the item with the X-axis: Click on the Yes button if you want to align the centre of the finger-hole within the selected item with the X-axis. Click on the No button to continue without repositioning the selected item. If ArtCAM JewelSmith cannot distinguish a finger-hole in the selected item aligned with the X-axis, a message box is displayed warning that the finger-hole must be aligned with the X-axis: Click on the OK button to close the message box. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 129

136 If there are no visible items in the 3D View window, a message box is displayed warning that there must be at least one visible replica mesh in the Project Tree: Click on the OK button to close the message box. For further information, see Toggling the Display of an Item (on page 25). If the selected item has a distinguishable finger-hole aligned with the X-axis but is currently hidden, a message box is displayed warning that the item must be visible: Click on the OK button to close the message box. For further information, see Toggling the Display of an Item (on page 25). If the selected item has a distinguishable finger-hole aligned with the X-axis and a model is currently open, a message box is displayed warning that a temporary model must be created during the calculation process, and that you will be prompted to save any changes you have made to the open model: Click on the OK button to close the message box, and continue with the calculation process. A progress bar is displayed in the status bar area indicating the progress ArtCAM JewelSmith is making in centring the selected item: 130 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

137 A temporary model is created during the centring process, although this is not shown in the Project Tree. A vector outline of the selected item and all of its associated visible items is created. This vector outline, referred to as an Assembly Silhouette, is drawn in the temporary model. When the selected item is centred, the temporary model is closed and discarded. 5. If you want to align the selected item with the X-axis, click on the Orient Ring Along X-Axis button in the Simple Transformations area. 6. In the Transform Relative To area, select the origin you want to use when repositioning the item: If you want to transform the item relative to the X=0, Y=0, Z=0 origin, select the World Centre option by clicking on its radio button. This method is selected by default. If you want to transform the item relative to its own origin, select the Component Centre by clicking on its radio button. 7. Type the distance by which you want to move the item in the Step box. 8. Use the arrows on the diagram to move the item around the specified origin along any of the three axes: If you attempt to nudge a selected item in the Project Tree when it is hidden, a message box is displayed asking if you want to continue: Click on the Yes button to nudge the selected item and close the message box; although you will not see the results until the visibility of the item is toggled on. Click on the No button to cancel the nudge and close the message box. Each click on the arrow moves the item up along the Z- axis by the increment specified in the Step box. Each click on the arrow moves the item down along the Z- axis by the increment specified in the Step box. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 131

138 Each click on the arrow moves the item up along the Y- axis by the increment specified in the Step box. Each click on the arrow moves the item down along the Y- axis by the increment specified in the Step box. Each click on the arrow moves the item left along the X- axis by the increment specified in the Step box. Each click on the arrow moves the item right along the X- axis by the increment specified in the Step box. You can see that the arrows are colour co-ordinated with the origin gnomen displayed in the 3D View window. This makes it easy to visualize exactly how you want to move the item. 9. Select the X, Y or Z option by clicking on its radio button to define the axis around which you want to rotate the item. You can see that the X, Y and Z options are colour co-ordinated with the origin gnomen displayed in the 3D View window. This makes it easy to visualize exactly how you want to rotate the item. 10. Define the angle by which you want to rotate the item in the Angle box. 11. Use either of the arrows to rotate the item around the specified origin: Each click on the arrow rotates the item clockwise by the increment specified in the Angle box. Each click on the arrow rotates the item anti-clockwise by the increment specified in the Angle box. 12. If you have repositioned the Root Assembly or an assembly for machining, you can apply or cancel its new position using the following methods in the Advanced area: Click on the arrow icon in the Advanced area to display its settings. These are hidden by default. If you want to save the current position of the item as its machining position, click on the Set World Centre button. If you want to reset the item to its previous machining position, click on the Return To World Centre button. The default machining position is set equal to the World Centre origin. 132 New ArtCAM Workflow What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

139 13. Click on the icon to close the settings. Using the Scale Tool You can adjust the size of the Root Assembly, an assembly or replica mesh or gem in the Project Tree. You can either scale the item in any of the three axes individually, or in all three axes simultaneously. To scale a selected item: 1. Click to select the item in the Project Tree that you want to scale. Its name is now shown in bold text in the Project Tree, its name is displayed on the splitter bar and its associated settings are displayed in the area beneath the splitter bar. 2. Click on the Scale button on the Project page to display its settings. The name of the item in the Project Tree that you are scaling is shown in the splitter bar. For example, Scale - New Assembly. 3. If you want to scale the selected item in only the X, Y or Z axis, you can do so using either of the following methods: Define the new size of the item; or Define the percentage by which you want to scale the item. For example, to increase the size of an item by twenty per cent in the Y-axis only, type 120 in the % box beside the green letter Y. 4. If you want to scale the item in all three axes simultaneously, define the percentage by which you want to scale its overall size in the All box. You can see that the X, Y and Z options are colour co-ordinated with the origin gnomen displayed in the view. This makes it easy to visualize exactly how you want to scale the item. 5. If you want to scale the selected item relative to its own workplane rather than the world workplane, make sure that the Scale relative to workplane option is selected. 6. Click on the Apply button to scale the item in the selected axes. 7. Click on the icon to close the settings. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New ArtCAM Workflow 133

140 Modified Interface The layout of ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 is considerably different to that which is found in ArtCAM JewelSmith 9.1. The changes to the layout are primarily found in the left panel of the interface, previously host to the Project, Assistant, Toolpaths and JewelSmith tabs, and the Main Menu bar. The changes can be divided into the following categories: Enhanced Project Tree (on page 134) Modified Tab Layout (on page 137); and Revised File Menu Options (on page 141) Enhanced Project Tree In ArtCAM JewelSmith 9.1 a project comprised a conventional Windows folder, referred to as the Project Folder, and within this folder was a 3D Master Model file (*.3DP). Further folders were created within this folder when a new component was created as part of the project. The project along with all of its associated models, assemblies, replica meshes and gems now comprises a single file. This file has the same suffix as that used with the 3D Master Model file (*.3dp), but is now referred to as the ArtCAM Project File. The following new items are associated with the Project Tree: The Models folder icon, which hosts all of the separate ArtCAM models within a project. This is a default item in the Project Tree whenever a project is open. 134 Modified Interface What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

141 The Root Assembly icon, which hosts all of the assemblies, replica meshes and gems within a project. This is a default item in the Project Tree whenever a project is open. The closed model icon, which represents each of the closed ArtCAM models that are part of the project. There can be several of these in the Project Tree. The following changes have been made to the Project Tree: The icon representing the Master Model project. now represents the The icon representing an open model has changed from to. The icon representing the artwork in an open model has been removed. The icon representing the pixel dimensions of the open model has been removed. The pixel dimensions of the open model are shown in the Model Information area of the Assistant's Home page. The icon representing the 3D View has been removed. The icon representing the composite relief has been removed. The icon representing the X and Y dimensions of the open model has been removed. The X and Y dimensions of the open model are shown in the Model Information area of the Assistant's Home page. The icon representing the Max Z height in the composite relief has been removed. The Max Z height in the composite relief is shown in the Model Information area of the Assistant's Home page. The icon representing the Min Z height in the composite relief has been removed. The Min Z height in the composite relief is shown in the Model Information area of the Assistant's Home page. The icon representing the co-ordinates of the origin in the composite relief has been removed. The icon representing the Material Setup has been removed. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Modified Interface 135

142 You can use the Toolpaths > Material Setup... menu option from the Main Menu bar to display the Material Setup dialog box. The icon representing the Machining has been renamed as Toolpaths. The icon representing a Wrapped Ring has been renamed as Rotary Relief. Each of the new items in the Project Tree has its own associated contextmenu, which is displayed by right-clicking on the item. Almost all of the items familiar to the Project Tree in previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith either have an entirely new context-menu or additional options. It is now far easier to work directly from the Project Tree. The Project tab is divided into two areas by a splitter bar, as shown below: The area above the splitter bar hosts the Project Tree, whilst the area below hosts all context-sensitive tools and/or information associated with the item currently selected in the Project Tree. When an item is selected in the Project Tree, its name together with its associated icon is displayed in the splitter bar. When a tool is selected from the Project tab, its name, and often the name of the item in the Project Tree on which the tool is being used, is displayed in the splitter bar. You can use the icons on the splitter bar as follows: Click on the icon to minimize the area below the splitter bar, thus hiding all context-sensitive tools and/or information associated with any item currently selected in the Project Tree. Click on the icon to maximize the area above the splitter bar, thus hiding the Project Tree. Click on the icon to restore the splitter bar to its previous position in the Project tab. To reposition the splitter bar: 1. Click on the splitter bar and drag upwards or downwards. 136 Modified Interface What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

143 The splitter bar is greyed-out when it is being moved, as shown below: 2. Release the mouse button to set the splitter bar in your preferred position. Modified Tab Layout The new layout of tabs and the tools associated with them is a result of the following changes: The JewelSmith tab has been removed. Buttons previously found on the JewelSmith tab have either been removed completely due to the new workflow, or can now be found on either the enhanced Project or Assistant tab. The Browse Project button in both the Project Tools area of the Project tab and the Project Manager area of the JewelSmith tab has been removed. This because all ArtCAM models associated with a project are now saved as part of the ArtCAM Project File (*.3dp) and displayed in the Project Tree. For details, see Opening an Existing Model (on page 58). The Close Project button in the Project Tools area of the Project tab has been removed. You must now close a project using the Main Menu bar. For details, see Closing a Project (on page 32). The Save button in the Project Tools area of the Project tab has been removed. You must now save a project using the Main Menu bar. For details, see Saving a Project (on page 30). The Add New Component button in the Project Tools area of the Project tab has been removed. You can now add new components using the context-sensitive tools which are displayed when either the Models folder or Root Assembly is selected in the Project Tree. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Modified Interface 137

144 The tools in the New Blanks area of the Project Components page, which were displayed after clicking on the Add New Component button, are now shown on the Project tab whenever the Models folder is selected in the Project Tree. The tools on the Shank Library page, which were displayed after clicking on the Shank Wizards button in the Libraries area of the Project Components page, are now shown on the Project tab whenever the Models folder is selected in the Project Tree. The Component Library button in the Libraries area of the Project Components page, is shown on the Project tab whenever the Root Assembly is selected in the Project Tree. The Multi-Sided Machining button in the Project Tools area of the Project tab is now the 3D Machining Wizard button in the Tools area of the Project tab. For details, see Using the Multi-Sided Machining Wizard (on page 97). The Movie button in the Project Tools area of the Project tab is now the Movie Wizard button in the Tools area of the Project tab. For details, see Creating a Movie (on page 93). The Edit Associated Model button in the Assembly Manager area of the Project tab has been removed. You can still open the ArtCAM model in the Project Tree used to create a replica mesh using the context-menu associated with the replica mesh. Both the model and the replica mesh must originate from within the same project. For details, see Editing an Associated Model. The Add Empty Assembly button in the Assembly Manager area of the Project tab has been removed. You can still create a new assembly in the Project Tree using the context-menu associated with any existing assembly. For details, see Creating an Empty Assembly (on page 73). 138 Modified Interface What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

145 The Master Model Tree button in the Project Manager area of the JewelSmith tab has been removed. You can view the Project Tree by clicking on the Project tab. You can toggle between the Project, Assistant and Toolpaths tabs using the F4 key on your keyboard. The Cut button in the Edit area of the Project tab as been removed. You can still cut an assembly from the Project Tree onto the ArtCAM clipboard using its associated context-menu. For details, see Cutting an Item (on page 28). The Copy button in the Edit area of the Project tab has been removed. You can still copy an assembly from the Project Tree to the ArtCAM clipboard using its associated context-menu. For details, see Copying and Pasting an Item (on page 29). The Paste button in the Edit area of the Project tab as been removed. You can still paste an assembly from the ArtCAM clipboard into the Project Tree using its associated context-menu. For details, see Copying and Pasting an Item (on page 29). The Delete button displayed in the Edit area of the Project tab when the Master Model or an assembly was selected in the Project Tree has been removed. You can still delete an assembly, replica mesh or gem from the Project Tree using its associated context-menu. For details, see Deleting an Item (on page 30). The Import button in the Edit area of the Project tab as been removed. You can still import an assembly or replica mesh into the Project Tree, and now also an ArtCAM model, using its associated context-menu. For details, see Importing an Assembly (on page 85), Importing a Replica Mesh (on page 117) and Importing a Model (on page 70). The Export button in the Edit area of the Project tab as been removed. You can still export an assembly or replica mesh from the Project Tree, and now also an ArtCAM model, using its associated context-menu. For details, see Exporting an Assembly (on page 86), Exporting a Replica Mesh (on page 122) and Exporting a Model (on page 71). What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Modified Interface 139

146 The Combine Master button in the General Tools area of the JewelSmith tab has been removed. You can still create a relief from an assembly or replica mesh in the Project Tree using its associated context-menu. For details, see Creating a Relief from an Assembly (on page 81) and Creating a Relief from a Replica Mesh (on page 114). The Subtract Master button in the General Tools area of the JewelSmith tab has been removed. You can still create a relief from an assembly or replica mesh in the Project Tree using its associated context-menu. For details, see Creating a Relief from an Assembly (on page 81) and Creating a Relief from a Replica Mesh (on page 114). The Merge Master button in the General Tools area of the JewelSmith tab has been removed. You can still create a relief from an assembly or replica mesh in the Project Tree using its associated context-menu. For details, see Creating a Relief from an Assembly (on page 81) and Creating a Relief from a Replica Mesh (on page 114). The Add To Master button in the General Tools area of the JewelSmith tab has been removed. You can still add a triangle mesh of the composite relief to the project using the Mesh Creator page. For details, see Adding a Replica Mesh to a Project (on page 109). The Mirror Relief button in the General Tools area of the JewelSmith tab has been removed. You can still mirror the content on a selected relief layer using the Relief Mirror Merge button page. in the Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home The Toggle Master Visibility button in the General Tools area of the JewelSmith tab has been removed. You can still toggle the visibility of the Root Assembly in the 3D View window using the Toggle Assembly Visibility button in the 3D View toolbar. For details, see Toggling the Display of an Item (on page 25). 140 Modified Interface What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

147 The Close Current File button in the General Tools area of the JewelSmith tab has been removed. You can still close the current ArtCAM model from the Project Tree using its associated context-menu. For details, see Closing a Model (on page 67). Revised File Menu Options The new layout of the Main Menu bar is a result of the following changes: The new File > New > Model... menu option. The new File > New > Project menu option. The new File > New > From Image File... menu option. The new File > Close Model menu option. The File > New Project... menu option is replaced with the File > New > Project menu option. The File > Open Project... menu option is replaced with the File > Open menu option. The File > Save Project menu option is replaced with the File > Save menu option. The File > Import... > Vector Data... menu option is replaced with the Vectors > Import... menu option. The File > Import... > 3D Model menu option is replaced with the Reliefs > Import 3D Model... menu option. The File > Import... > 3D Model For Unwrapping menu option is replaced with the Reliefs > Import 3D Model For Unwrapping... menu option. The File > Import... > Load CopyCAD Wrapping Data menu option is replaced with the Reliefs > Load CopyCAD Wrapping Data... menu option. The File > Export... menu option is replaced with the Vectors > Export... menu. The File > New (Specify Pixel Size)... menu option is replaced with the File > New > Model (Specify Pixel Size)... menu option. The Vectors > Create Feature menu option has been removed, along with its associated options. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Modified Interface 141

148 The Reliefs > Paste From File... menu option is replaced with the Reliefs > Import... menu option. The Reliefs > Swept Profiles Wizard... menu option is replaced with the Reliefs > Swept Profiles menu option. The Reliefs > Two Rail Sweep... menu option is replaced with the Reliefs > Swept Profiles > Two Rail Sweep... menu option. The Reliefs > Create Ring... menu option is replaced with the Reliefs > Create Rotary Relief... menu option. The Toolpaths > Toolpath Data > Load... menu option is replaced with the Toolpaths > Import Toolpaths... menu option. The Toolpaths > Save Toolpath... menu option is replaced with the Toolpaths > Save Toolpath As... menu option. The Toolpaths > Save Simulation menu option is replaced with the Toolpaths > Save Simulation As... menu option. The new Toolpaths > Save Toolpaths As Template... menu option. The new Toolpaths > Calculate Toolpath menu option. The new Toolpaths > Create Relief From Simulation menu option. 142 Modified Interface What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

149 Enhanced Bitmap Import You can now create a new model from any of the following types of bitmap image files, or import any of them into an open ArtCAM model as a new bitmap layer: Windows or OS/2 Bitmap (*.bmp) Windows or OS/2 DIB (*.dib) Windows or CompuServe RLE (*.rle) JPEG Image - JFIF Compliant (*.jpg, *.jpeg, *.jpe and *.jfif) CompuServe Graphics Interchange (*.gif) Windows Enhanced Meta File (*.emf) Windows Meta File (*.wmf) Tagged Image File Format (*.tif and *.tiff ) Portable Network Graphics (*.png) Windows Icon (*.ico) For example, the options available in the Files of type list box associated with the Open dialog are as follows: ArtCAM JewelSmith What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Bitmap Import 143

150 ArtCAM JewelSmith Enhanced 3D Model Import You can now import the following types of 3D models into an open ArtCAM model or as a replica mesh in the Project Tree. You must have PS-Exchange or above installed on your computer if you want to import all of the listed triangle and surface models. Triangle models: 3D Assembly (*.3da) ArtCAM Project (*.3dp) 3D Studio (*.3ds) Drawing Interchange File (*.dxf) Binary or ASCII STL (*.stl) Universal 3D File (*.u3d) Wavefront Object File (*.obj) Delcam Machining Triangles (*.dmt) Surface models: 3D NURBS Modeller - Rhinoceros (*.3dm) 144 Enhanced 3D Model Import What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

151 Delcam DGK (*.dgk) SolidWorks Part File (*.sldprt) IGES Format (*.igs, *.ige and *.iges) ACIS File (*.sat) CATIA File (*.fic) CATIA5 (*.catpart and *.catproduct) Cimatron File (*.pfm) Elite File (*.elt) Ideas File (*.mf1 and *.prt) Inventor File (*.ipt) Parasolid Files (*.x_t, *.xmt_txt, *.x_b and *.xmt_bin) Parts File (*.psmodel) DDX Files (*.ddx and *.ddz) Pro/Engineer Files (*.asm and *.par) SpaceClaim File (*.scdoc) Step Files (*.stp and *.step) Unigraphics File (*.prt) VDAFS File (*.vda) To import a 3D model into an open ArtCAM model: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced 3D Model Import 145

152 1. Click on the Reliefs > Import 3D Model... menu option from the Main Menu bar to display the Import 3D Model dialog box: 2. Click on the Look in list box and select the folder on your computer in which the 3D model that you want to import is stored. All supported files are listed in the window by default. 3. Click on the Files of type list box, followed by the option that includes the type of model that you want to import. The All Supported Files option is selected by default. 3D Assembly (*.3da) and ArtCAM Project (*.3dp) files can only be imported into a project as an assembly. If you want to list only the triangle models available in the current folder, click on the Triangle Models (*.3da; *.3dp; *.3ds; *. dxf; *.stl; *.u3d; *.obj; *.dmt) option. If you want to list only the surface models available in the current folder, select the Surface Models (*.3dm; *.dgk; *.sldprt; *.igs; *.ige; *.iges; *.sat; *.fic; *.catpart; *.catproduct; *.pfm; *.elt; *.mf1; *.prt; *.ipt; *.x_t; *.xmt_txt; *.x_b; *.xmt_bin; *.psmodel; *.ddx; *.ddz; *.asm; *.par; *.scdoc; *.stp; *.step; *.prt; *.vda) option. 4. Click on the name of the 3D model that you want to import. Its name is displayed in the File name box. 146 Enhanced 3D Model Import What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

153 5. Click on the Open button to import the selected 3D model into ArtCAM JewelSmith and display the Paste 3D Model dialog box: 6. Make sure that the relief layer in the Reliefs area of the Layers Manger on which you want to paste the 3D model is selected. 7. Click on the Paste button to close the Paste 3D Model dialog box and paste the model onto the selected relief layer. A progress bar is displayed in the status bar area during the calculation process: 8. Click on the Close button to close the Paste 3D Model dialog box. To import a 3D model as part of a project: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced 3D Model Import 147

154 1. Right-click on the Root Assembly or assembly in the Project Tree with which you want to associate a replica mesh of the imported 3D model to display its context-menu, then click on the Import... menu option to display the Import 3D Model dialog box: 2. Click on the Look in list box and select the folder on your computer in which the 3D model that you want to import is stored. All supported files are listed in the window by default. 3. Click on the Files of type list box, followed by the option that includes the type of model that you want to import. The All Supported Files option is selected by default. 3D Assembly (*.3da) and ArtCAM Project (*.3dp) files can only be imported into a project as an assembly. If you want to list only the triangle models available in the current folder, click on the Triangle Models (*.3da; *.3dp; *.3ds; *. dxf; *.stl; *.u3d; *.obj; *.dmt) option. If you want to list only the surface models available in the current folder, select the Surface Models (*.3dm; *.dgk; *.sldprt; *.igs; *.ige; *.iges; *.sat; *.fic; *.catpart; *.catproduct; *.pfm; *.elt; *.mf1; *.prt; *.ipt; *.x_t; *.xmt_txt; *.x_b; *.xmt_bin; *.psmodel; *.ddx; *.ddz; *.asm; *.par; *.scdoc; *.stp; *.step; *.prt; *.vda) option. 4. Click on the name of the 3D model that you want to import. Its name is displayed in the File name box. 148 Enhanced 3D Model Import What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

155 5. Click on the Open button to import the selected model into ArtCAM JewelSmith. A progress bar is displayed in the status bar area during the calculation process: 6. Click on the expand icon beside the selected Root Assembly or assembly in the Project Tree to display its associated items. A replica mesh of the imported model is created directly beneath the Root Assembly or assembly, and this adopts the name of the original triangle or surface model file. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced 3D Model Import 149

156 Enhanced Bitmap To Vector Tool In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, the Vectors From Bitmap dialog box allowed you to create vector artwork around the outline of all areas of an image on a bitmap layer drawn in the current Primary Colour, together with those colours from the Colour Palette linked to the Primary Colour. All of the settings associated with the Vectors From Bitmap dialog box have now been consolidated onto a single page of settings displayed in the Assistant window. Moreover, you can now calculate a vector centreline from all areas of the bitmap layer in the current Primary Colour, together with those colours that are linked to the Primary Colour. This is particularly useful for calculating a centreline from bitmap images of text. To create a vector boundary and/or centreline from a bitmap image: 150 Enhanced Bitmap To Vector Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

157 1. Select the bitmap layer hosting the image that you want to convert into vector artwork. 2. Click on the colour within the Colour Palette that you want to select as the Primary Colour. 3. Click on the Bitmap To Vector button in the Bitmap Tools area of the Assistant's Home page to display the Vectors From Bitmap page. 4. Define the tolerance you want to use in the Pixel Tolerance box. This controls how closely the spans in the resulting vector artwork follow the pixilated outline of the bitmap image. 5. Select the method that you want to use when converting the bitmap image by clicking on the appropriate radio button: Spline all points - this option fits bezier curve spans between all points (nodes) in the resulting vectors. Keep lines - this option fits bezier curve spans between all points (nodes), except where the number of consecutive pixels you define in the Min Pixel Length box form a straight line. 6. Make sure that the Create Boundary option is selected if you want to create a vector around all areas of the bitmap image in the current Primary Colour, and in those colours linked to the Primary Colour. 7. If you want to create centreline vectors from the bitmap image: First, make sure that the Create Centreline option is selected. You can calculate the centreline from a bitmap image whether or not you are creating the boundary vectors at the same time. If you want the centreline to comprise open vectors, make sure that the Disconnected Open Vectors option is selected by clicking on its radio button. The centreline comprises a greater number of vectors when the Disconnected Open Vectors option is used. If you want the centreline to comprise closed vectors, make sure that the Closed Vector Loops option is selected by clicking on its radio button. 8. Make sure that the vector layer on which you want to create the vector artwork from the bitmap image is selected. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Bitmap To Vector Tool 151

158 9. Click on the Create Vectors button to calculate the vector artwork on the selected vector layer. The vector artwork is magenta and surrounded by a bounding box, indicating that it is selected. You can use the 2D Bitmap Contrast tool to fade the image on the bitmap layer and view the vector artwork created from it clearly. Alternatively, you can toggle the visibility for the bitmap layer so that the image is hidden completely. 10. Click on the Close button to return to the Assistant's Home page. Modified Primary and Secondary Colours Whenever you create or open an existing model in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008, a default Colour Palette is displayed beneath the 2D View window. In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, the default Primary Colour in the Colour Palette is white and the default Secondary Colour is black. In each new model, the default Primary Colour is now black and the default Secondary Colour is now white. 152 Modified Primary and Secondary Colours What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

159 When opening a model created in earlier versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, the Primary and Secondary Colours are whichever colours were last chosen before saving the model. If no colours were chosen, the default Primary Colour remains as white and the default Secondary Colour as black. Enhanced Swept Profile Tools In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, you could create an extruded, spun or turned shape using a Wizard only. All of the settings previously found in each of the pages associated with each of the three Wizards have been consolidated onto a single page of settings displayed in the Assistant window. The layout of the settings associated with these tools is now consistent with that already familiar to the Two Rail Sweep tool. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools 153

160 The Reliefs > Swept Profiles Wizard... menu option has been removed from the Main Menu bar, along with its associated Wizard page: You can now display the settings previously associated with the Extrude Wizard using either of the following methods: Click on the Extrude button in the Swept Profiles toolset shown in the Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home page; or Click on the Reliefs > Swept Profiles > Extrude... menu option from the Main Menu bar. You can now display the settings previously associated with the Spin Wizard using either of the following methods: Click on the Spin button in the Swept Profiles toolset shown in the Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home page; or Click on the Reliefs > Swept Profiles > Spin... menu option from the Main Menu bar. You can now display the settings previously associated with the Turn Wizard using either of the following methods: Click on the Turn button in the Swept Profiles toolset shown in the Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home page; or Click on the Reliefs > Swept Profiles > Turn... menu option from the Main Menu bar. 154 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

161 Updated Extrude Tool In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, you could extrude a shape using the Extrude Wizard: The Extrude Wizard has been removed and all of the settings previously found in each of the steps associated with this have been consolidated onto a single page of settings displayed in the Assistant window. You can extrude a shape on a relief layer using up to four vectors. The first of the vectors defines the line along which the shape is extruded. This is referred to as the drive curve. The second vector defines the start cross-section of the shape, while the third defines the end cross-section. The vector used to define the end cross-section can be the same as that used to define the start cross-section. The optional fourth vector determines the height of the shape in the Z direction. In the following example, you can see how shapes can be extruded from vectors to form a harp: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools 155

162 Before... After... To extrude a shape: 1. Make sure that the relief layer on which you want to extrude the shape is selected. 2. You can display the Extrude page in the Assistant window using either of the following methods: Click on the Extrude button in the Swept Profiles toolset shown in the Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home page. If you cannot see this button, click on the icon along the right-edge of whichever button is currently shown in the Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home page to display the Swept Profiles toolset: You can also click on the icon at the right-end of the toolset to pin all of the buttons that make up the toolset in the Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home page. Click on the Reliefs > Swept Profiles > Extrude... menu option from the Main Menu bar. 3. Click to select the vector along which you want the cross-section to be swept. This is referred to as the drive curve. 4. Click on the Select button in the Drive Curve area. Arrows are displayed along the selected vector to show the direction of the drive curve and on which side the cross-sections are to be attached. 156 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

163 When deselected, the vector chosen as the drive curve is red. In order to begin creating the frame of the harp in our example, the polyline numbered below is selected as the drive curve. We can also see the direction arrow positioned along the left-edge of the polyline. 5. If you want to change the properties of the drive curve, select the appropriate options: If you want to reverse the direction of the drive curve, click to select the Reverse curve direction option. The arrow(s) along the selected vector are shown in the opposite direction. If you want to change the side of the drive curve along which the cross-section is extruded, click to select the Use other side option. The arrow(s) along the selected vector are now shown on the opposite side. If you want to use the drive curve as the centreline for the extrusion, click to select the Use as a centreline option. The arrow(s) are shown along both sides of the selected vector. The Use other side option is greyed-out if you have the Use as a centreline option selected. If you want to produce an extruded shape with sharp-edged corners, click to select the Create square corners option. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools 157

164 6. To reverse the direction of the drive curve, click to select the Reverse curve direction option. 7. Click to select the open, ungrouped vector that you want to use as the cross-section at the start of the extruded shape. This is referred to as the start profile. 8. Click on the Select button in the Start Profile area. The arrows on the start profile show the current Z-axis direction. The side of the start profile on which the arrows are positioned determine the side on which the shape is extruded. When deselected, the vector chosen as the start profile is blue. In our example, the vector numbered below is selected as the start profile: 9. If you want to change the properties of the start profile, click on the appropriate options: To change the position of the start point (node) in the selected vector, click to select the Move anchor point to other end option. The start point (node) is green and determines which end of the start profile is attached to the drive curve. To invert the selected vector in the Z-axis direction, click to select the Invert curve in Z option. 10. If you want to use another open, ungrouped vector as the profile at the end of the extruded shape: 158 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

165 First click to select the use separate end profile option. Now click to select the open, ungrouped vector that you want to use as the cross-section at the end of the extruded shape. This is referred to as the end profile. Next click on the Select button in the End Profile area. When deselected, the vector chosen as the end profile is blue. 11. If you want to change the properties of the end profile, click on the options that you want to use: To change the position of the start point (node) in the selected vector, click to select the Move anchor point to other end option. The start point (node) is green and determines which end of the start profile is attached to the drive curve. To invert the selected vector in the Z-axis direction, click to select the Invert curve in Z option. In our example, the vector used for the end profile is the same as that which was selected as the start profile. 12. To add a vector and scale the swept profile in the Z-axis along its length: First click to select the Use a z modulation profile option. Now click to select the vector that you want to use as the z modulation vector. Next click on the Select button in the Z Modulation area. When deselected, the vector chosen as the Z modulation vector is green. 13. If you want to change the properties of the z modulation vector, click on the options that you want to use: To change the position of the start point (node) in the selected vector, click to select the Move anchor point to other end option. The start point (node) is green and determines which end of the start profile is attached to the z modulation vector. To invert the selected vector in the Z-axis direction, click to select the Invert curve in Z option. 14. Select the method in the Combine area that you want to use to combine the extruded shape with the content on the selected relief layer: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools 159

166 The combine method selected here controls how the extruded shape is combined with the selected relief layer only. It does not control how the extruded shape is combined with the composite relief. How the extruded shape is combined with other relief layers to form the composite relief is determined by the combine mode assigned to the layer itself. Click on the Add radio button if you want to add the extruded shape to the selected relief layer. Click on the Subtract radio button if you want to subtract the extruded shape from the selected relief layer. Click on the Highest radio button to merge the extruded shape with the selected relief layer, so that only the highest points show. Click on the Lowest radio button to merge the extruded shape with the selected relief layer, so that only the lowest points show. In our example, the Highest option is selected. 15. Click on the Calculate button to combine the extruded shape with the selected relief layer. 16. Click on the Close button to return to the Assistant's Home page. In our example, the extruded shape on the selected relief layer appears in the 3D View window as follows: The blocks at the top and bottom of the harp frame in our example were created on the selected relief layer prior to the extruded shape by applying a flat shape with a Start Height of 3.5 mm (0.14") to the red bitmap colour marking the shape of the blocks, and then using the Reliefs > Calculate > Replace menu option on the Main Menu bar. 160 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

167 Updated Spin Tool In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, you could spin a shape using the Spin Wizard: The Spin Wizard has been removed and all of the settings previously found in each of the steps associated with this have been consolidated onto a single page of settings displayed in the Assistant window. You can spin a shape using up to three vectors. The first of these defines the start cross-section and the second defines the end cross-section of the shape. The vector used to define the end cross-section can be the same as that used to define the start cross-section. The optional third vector determines the height of the shape in the Z direction. In the following example, you can see how a shape can be spun using vector artwork along with other relief editing techniques to create a group of leaves: Before After What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools 161

168 To create a spun shape: 1. Make sure that the relief layer on which you want to spin the shape is selected. 2. You can display the Spin page in the Assistant window using either of the following methods: Click on the Spin button in the Swept Profiles toolset shown in the Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home page. If you cannot see this button, click on the icon along the right-edge of whichever button is currently shown in the Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home page to display the Swept Profiles toolset: You can also click on the icon at the right-end of the toolset to pin all of the buttons that make up the toolset in the Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home page. Click on the Reliefs > Swept Profiles > Spin... menu option from the Main Menu bar. 3. Click to select the ungrouped, open vector that you want to use as the cross-section at the start of the spun shape. This is referred to as the start profile. The vector is magenta and surrounded by a bounding box. 4. Click on the Select button in the Start Profile area. Arrows are displayed about the selected vector to show the side on which side the cross-sections are to be attached. When deselected, the vector chosen as the start profile is blue. 162 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

169 In order to begin creating the leaf design in our example, the polyline shown below is selected as the start profile: 5. If you want to change the properties of the start profile, select the options that you want to use: To change the position of the start point (node) in the selected vector, click to select the Move anchor point to other end option. The start point (node) is green and determines the point around which the start profile is spun. To invert the selected vector in the Z-axis direction, click to select the Invert curve in Z option. 6. Select the open, ungrouped vector that you want to use as the cross-section at the end of the spun shape. This is referred to as the end profile. If you want to use the same vector that you have already used as the start profile: Make sure that the Use separate end profile option is deselected. In our example, the vector used as the end profile is the same as that which was selected as the start profile. If you want to use another vector: Make sure that the Use separate end profile option is selected. The End Profile settings are displayed. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools 163

170 Click to select the vector that you want to use as the crosssection at the end of the spun shape. The vector is magenta and surrounded by a bounding box, while the vector previously selected as the start profile is now red. Click on the Select button in the End Profile area. Arrows are displayed about the selected vector to show the side on which side the cross-sections are to be attached. When deselected, the vector chosen as the end profile is blue. If you want to change the properties of the end profile, select the options that you want to use: To change the position of the start point (node) in the selected vector, click to select the Move anchor point to other end option. The start point (node) is green and determines the point around which the end profile is spun. To invert the selected vector in the Z-axis direction, click to select the Invert curve in Z option. 7. If you want to scale the profile(s) in the Z-axis along its length: Make sure that the Use Z modulation profile option is selected. The Z Modulation settings are displayed. Click to select the vector that you want to use as the Z modulation vector. The vector is magenta and surrounded by a bounding box. In our example, the polyline shown below is selected as the Z modulation vector: 164 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

171 Click on the Select button in the Z Modulation area. Arrows are displayed about the selected vector to show the side on which side the cross-sections are to be attached. When deselected, the vector chosen as the Z modulation vector is green. To change the position of the start point (node) in the selected vector, click to select the Move anchor point to other end option. The start point (node) is green and reverses the direction of the Z modulation vector. To invert the selected vector in the Z-axis direction, click to select the Invert curve in Z option. If you do not want to scale the profiles in the Z-axis along its length: Make sure that the Use Z modulation profile option is deselected. 8. You are now ready to define how the shape is swept. If you want to sweep the profiles clockwise through 360 starting from a specific angle: Make sure that the Sweep through 360 degrees option is selected. Define the angle at which you want to begin sweep in the Start Angle box. If you want to sweep the profile through a specific angle and in a specific direction: Make sure that the Sweep through 360 degrees option is deselected. Define the angle at which you want to begin sweeping in the Start Angle box. Define the angle at which you want to end sweeping in the End Angle box. Select the direction in which you want to sweep the profiles by clicking on either the Clockwise or Anticlockwise radio button. In our example, the profile is swept from 0 through 360 in a clockwise direction. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools 165

172 9. Select the method in the Combine area that you want to use to combine the spun shape with the content on the selected relief layer: The combine method selected here controls how the spun shape is combined with the selected relief layer only. It does not control how the spun shape is combined with the composite relief. How the spun shape is combined with other relief layers to form the composite relief is determined by the combine mode assigned to the layer itself. Click on the Add radio button if you want to add the spun shape to the selected relief layer. Click on the Subtract radio button if you want to subtract the spun shape from the selected relief layer. Click on the Highest radio button to merge the spun shape with the selected relief layer, so that only the highest points show. Click on the Lowest radio button to merge the spun shape with the selected relief layer, so that only the lowest points show. In our example, the Add option is selected. 10. Click on the Calculate button to combine the spun shape with the selected relief layer. In our example, the content on the selected relief layer appears in the 3D View window as shown: The wave effect in the spun shape is achieved by using the Z modulation vector. The overall shape of the leaves is achieved by selecting green from the Colour Palette as the Primary Colour and then clicking on the Reliefs > Keep Under Colour menu option. 166 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

173 11. Click on the Close button to return to the Assistant's Home page. Updated Turn Tool In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, you could turn a shape using the Turn Wizard: The Turn Wizard has been removed and all of the settings previously found in each of the steps associated with this have been consolidated onto a single page of settings displayed in the Assistant window. You can turn a shape using an open, ungrouped vector. An imaginary line between the start point (node) and end point (node) in the selected vector acts as an axis about which it is turned to create the cross-section of the shape. In the following example, you can see how a shape can be turned using vectors to form castle turrets: Before... After... To turn a shape: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools 167

174 1. Make sure that the relief layer on which you want to turn the shape is selected. 2. You can display the Turn page in the Assistant window using either of the following methods: Click on the Turn button in the Swept Profiles toolset shown in the Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home page. If you cannot see this button, click on the icon along the right-edge of whichever button is currently shown in the Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home page to display the Swept Profiles toolset: You can also click on the icon at the right-end of the toolset to pin all of the buttons that make up the toolset in the Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home page. Click on the Reliefs > Swept Profiles > Turn... menu option from the Main Menu bar. 3. Click to select the ungrouped, open vector that you want to use as the cross-section of the turned shape. This is referred to as the profile. 4. Click on the Select button. Arrows are displayed about the selected vector to show the direction from the start point to the end point. In order to begin creating castle turrets in our example, the polyline numbered below is selected as the profile: 168 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

175 5. In the Z Scale Factor box, define the scaling factor that you want to apply to the profile in the Z-axis direction. The default value of 1 produces a semi-circular cross-section. When deselected, the vector chosen as the profile is red. In our example, a scale factor of 0.5 is applied to the profile. If you want to change any of the settings before calculating the turned shape, click on the Reset button. 6. Select the method in the Combine area that you want to use to combine the turned shape with the content on the selected relief layer: The combine method selected here controls how the turned shape is combined with the selected relief layer only. It does not control how the turned shape is combined with the composite relief. How the turned shape is combined with other relief layers to form the composite relief is determined by the combine mode assigned to the layer itself. Click on the Add radio button if you want to add the turned shape to the selected relief layer. Click on the Subtract radio button if you want to subtract the turned shape from the selected relief layer. Click on the Highest radio button to merge the turned shape with the selected relief layer, so that only the highest points show. Click on the Lowest radio button to merge the turned shape with the selected relief layer, so that only the lowest points show. In our example, the Add option is selected. 7. Click on the Calculate button to combine the turned shape with the selected relief layer. 8. Click on the Close button to return to the Assistant's Home page. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Swept Profile Tools 169

176 In our example, the selected relief layer is shown in the 3D View window as follows: The crenellations within the castle turrets are created by selecting white as the Primary Colour, and then using the Zero Relief Under Colour button in the Relief Colour toolset shown in the Reliefs area of the Assistant's Home page. Enhanced Shape Editor In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, you could only create threedimensional shapes using the Shape Editor tool and the bitmap image shown in the 2D View window. You can now project an image hosted on a bitmap layer onto the composite relief shown in the 3D View window and then use the Shape Editor tool to create three-dimensional shapes on a selected relief layer directly from there. To create three-dimensional shapes using bitmap colours shown in the 3D View window: 1. Make sure that the bitmap layer from which you want to create three-dimensional shapes is selected from the stack shown in the Bitmaps area of the Layers Manager. 170 Enhanced Shape Editor What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

177 Make sure that the selected bitmap layer is also visible. If you cannot see the image associated with the selected bitmap layer, click on the Toggle All Visibility button in the Bitmaps area of the Layers Manager. 2. Click on the 3D View button in the 2D View toolbar to display the 3D View window. 3. Click on the Colour Shade button in the 3D View toolbar to display the image hosted on the selected bitmap layer in the 3D View window. If the Use colours from 2D view option is selected on the Interactive Sculpting page, the Colour Shade button is disabled. If the 2D View option is selected in the Material area of the Lights And Material page, the Colour Shade button is disabled. 4. Double-click on the colour from which you want to create a threedimensional shape to display the Shape Editor dialog box: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Shape Editor 171

178 You cannot use the Shape Editor dialog box when the Interactive Sculpting page is displayed in the Assistant window. 5. In the Shape Editor dialog box, select the profile of the shape that you want to create from the selected bitmap colour: Click on the Round button from the selected bitmap colour. to create a rounded shape Click on the Angular button from the selected bitmap colour. to create an angled shape Click on the Plane button selected bitmap colour. to create a flat shape from the You can restore the default settings in the Shape Editor dialog box by clicking on the Reset button. 6. If you want to create a rounded or angled shape, you can define an angle using any of the following methods: 172 Enhanced Shape Editor What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

179 Define the angle in the Angle box. Type a positive value to produce a convex shape and a negative value to produce a concave shape. Type a value of 0 to produce a plane. Click and drag on the slider to the left of the Angle box. Drag the slider upward to increase the angle of the shape. Drag the slider downward to decrease the angle. The angle is shown in the Angle box. Click on the up or down arrow on the right of the Angle box. The angle is shown in the Angle box. The default angle for a rounded or an angled shape is Define the height at which the shape starts in the Z direction in the Start Height box. This creates a vertical side-wall beneath the shape. If you are creating a flat shape, this value controls the height of the plane. 8. Select the height option that you want to use: If you are creating a plane, all of the height options are greyed-out. If so, go straight to the next step. To allow the shape to grow to the height that it would naturally reach, select the No Limit option by clicking on its radio button. If you want to apply a scaling factor to the Z-axis of the shape, click to select the Scale option and then define the scaling factor in the Scale box, or click and drag on the slider that is activated. To allow the shape to grow to a specific height and then plateau, select the Limit To Height option by clicking on its radio button and then define the height in the Height box that is activated. If the natural height of the shape exceeds that of the value defined in the Height box, a flat top appears on the shape. If you want to apply a scaling factor to the shape in its Z-axis, click to select the Scale option and then define the scaling factor in the Scale box or click and drag on the slider that is activated. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Shape Editor 173

180 To allow the shape to grow to a specific height by applying a scaling factor in its Z-axis, select the Scale To Height option by clicking on its radio button and then define the height in the Height box that is activated. This option does not produce a flat top on the shape. 9. Click on the Apply button to apply the current shape attributes to the selected bitmap colour. The shape that you have chosen to create is shown in the selected colour within the Colour Palette beneath the 2D View window. 10. Make sure that the relief layer on which you want to create shapes in the areas associated with the selected bitmap colour is selected from the stack shown in the Reliefs area of the Layers Manager. 11. Select the relief combine mode that you want to use: The combine mode selected here controls how the shape is combined with the selected relief layer only. It does not control how the shape is combined with the composite relief. How the shape is combined with other relief layers to form the composite relief is determined by the combine mode assigned to the layer itself. Click on the Add button to add the points in the shape to the selected relief layer. Click on the Subtract button to subtract the points in the shape from the selected relief layer. Click on the Zero button to reset all areas on the selected relief layer under the current Primary Colour to zero. Click on the Merge High button to merge the shape with the selected relief layer, so that only the highest points remain. Click on the Merge Low button to merge the shape with the selected relief layer, so that only the lowest points remain. Click on the Zero Rest button to reset all areas of the selected relief layer other than those under the current Primary Colour to zero. 12. Click on the Close button to close the Shape Editor dialog box. 174 Enhanced Shape Editor What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

181 New Magic Wand Tool The new Magic Wand tool allows you to create vector boundaries around adjacent consistently coloured areas of a bitmap layer or contiguous areas of the composite relief at a consistent height. To draw vector boundaries around adjacent consistently coloured areas of a selected bitmap layer: You can create vector boundaries using the selected bitmap layer from either the 2D View or 3D View window. However, if you are working in the 3D View window it is easier to if the Colour Shade button in the 3D View toolbar is toggled on. 1. Make sure that the bitmap layer hosting the image from which you want to create vector boundaries around a specific colour is selected from the stack shown in the Bitmaps area of the Layers Manager. Make sure that the selected bitmap layer is also visible. If you cannot see the bitmap image associated with the selected bitmap layer, click on the Toggle All Visibility button in the Bitmaps area of the Layers Manager. 2. Make sure that the vector layer on which you want ArtCAM JewelSmith to draw the resulting artwork is selected from the stack shown in the Vectors area of the Layers Manager. Make sure that the selected vector layer is also visible, otherwise the resulting vector artwork cannot be seen after the calculation process is complete. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New Magic Wand Tool 175

182 3. Click on the Magic Wand Tool button in the Bitmap Tools area of the Assistant's Home page to display the Magic Wand Tool page. 4. Select the Image Colour option by clicking on its radio button. 5. In the Tolerance box, define the percentage range within which RGB variations of the selected colour are included. Type a lower value to include colours similar to the pixel on which you click, and a higher value to include a broad range of colours. 6. Position the dropper over a pixel of the colour in the bitmap image around which you want to create vector boundaries, and then click to calculate the vector artwork. A progress bar is displayed in the status bar area during the calculation process: The resulting vector artwork is drawn on the selected vector layer. 7. Click on the Close button to return to the Assistant's Home page. To draw vector boundaries around contiguous areas of the composite relief at a consistent height: You can create vector boundaries using the composite relief from either the 2D View or 3D View window. However, if you are working in the 2D View window it is easier to produce meaningful results if a greyscale of the composite relief is shown. 1. Make sure that all of the separate relief layers that you want to include as part of the composite relief are visible. 2. Make sure that the vector layer on which you want ArtCAM JewelSmith to draw the resulting artwork is selected from the stack shown in the Vectors area of the Layers Manager. 3. Click on the Magic Wand Tool button in the Bitmap Tools area of the Assistant's Home page to display the Magic Wand Tool page. 4. Select the Relief Height option by clicking on its radio button. 5. In the Tolerance box, define the distance above or below the height of the composite relief directly beneath the mouse cursor at which contigous shapes created across relief layers are included. 176 New Magic Wand Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

183 6. Position the dropper over area of the composite relief at the height around which you want to create vector boundaries, then click to calculate the vector artwork. You can see the exact height of the composite relief directly beneath the mouse cursor by looking at the value shown in the Z area beneath the Layers and Add In tabs: A progress bar is displayed beneath the 3D View window during the calculation process: The resulting vector artwork is drawn on the selected vector layer. 7. Press the F2 key on your keyboard to display the 2D View window. You can now see the vector boundaries created from the composite relief at the height originally beneath the mouse cursor. Enhanced Mesh Creator When creating a triangle mesh in ArtCAM JewelSmith 9.1 you could only close a triangle mesh using the composite relief resulting from the layer stack associated with the back surface of the piece. You now have greater control over how the back face is created in the triangle mesh, if at all. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Mesh Creator 177

184 You can also define the angle of the triangles in the resulting triangle mesh, thus smoothing its overall appearance. You can now also add the triangle mesh to the project directly from the Mesh Creator page. This follows the removal of the Add To Master button previously found in the General Tools area of the also redundant JewelSmith tab. To create a triangle mesh from the composite relief: 1. Click on the Create Triangle Mesh button in the Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home page to display the Mesh Creator page. You can also right-click on an open model in the Project Tree to display its context-menu, and then click on the Create Mesh... option to display the Mesh Creator page. Alternatively, you can click on the Reliefs > Create Triangle Mesh... menu option from the Main Menu bar. 2. Define the name of the assembly that is associated with the triangle mesh whenever it is added to the project in the Assembly Name box. The name of the model is displayed by default. If you are not currently working on a model as part of a project, the Assembly Name box is not displayed. 3. In the Triangulation Parameters area, define the tolerance in the Tolerance box that you want to use to control the number of triangles that are created. If you cannot see the settings in the Triangulation Parameters area, click on the arrow icon to display them. 4. Define if and how a back face is created in the triangle mesh: If you want to create an open mesh, select the Open Mesh option by clicking on its radio button. If you want to close the mesh using the composite relief resulting from the layer stack associated with the back surface of the piece, select the Close with Back Relief option by clicking on its radio button. If you want to close the mesh with a flat plane at the Z zero height, select the Close with a Flat Plane option by clicking on its radio button. 178 Enhanced Mesh Creator What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

185 If you are creating a triangle mesh from a shank relief resulting from using one of the tools in the New Shanks area, it is recommended that you use this option. For details, see Creating a New Model from a Shank (on page 55). If you want to close the mesh with an inverted copy of the composite relief resulting from the layer stack associated with the front surface of the piece, select the Close with Inverted Front option by clicking on its radio button. If you want to close the mesh with an offset copy of the composite relief resulting from the layer stack associated with the front surface of the piece, select the Close with Offset option by clicking on its radio button and then define its thickness in the Thickness box directly below. 5. If you intend to wrap the resulting mesh around a curved surface: First click to select the Limit Triangles option. Now click on the Triangle Length list box, followed by the option for the axes along which you limit the length of each triangle. If you want to limit the length of each triangle along both the X and Y-axis, click to select the Max Length option. If you want to limit the length of each triangle along the X-axis only, click to select the Max X Length option. If you want to limit the length of each triangle along the Y-axis only, click to select the Max Y Length option. Next define the maximum length of the side(s) in each triangle in the Tri Side Length box. If the Limit Triangles option is selected and the Tri Side Length is set to zero, a message box is displayed warning that a value greater than zero must be used when limiting triangles: Click on the OK button to close the message box. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Mesh Creator 179

186 6. Click on the Create Triangles button to create the triangle mesh according to your chosen settings. The volume of the triangle mesh and the number of triangles created are shown in the Result area. If there are no relief layers currently visible in the 3D View window, a message box is displayed warning that the triangle mesh has not been generated: Click on the OK button to close the message box. A second message box is displayed warning that the triangle mesh has not been created: Click on the OK button to close the message box. 7. If you want to calculate the approximate weight of the piece after the manufacturing process: If you cannot see the settings in the Properties area, click on the arrow icon to display them. First define the estimated shrinkage in volume as a percentage in the Shrinkage box Next click on the Weight list box, followed by the option for the material in which you intend to manufacture the piece. Now click on the Update button. The volume of the triangle mesh and/or the number of triangles created is updated in the Results area. 8. Click on the Triangle Drawing list box, followed by the option that you want to use when rendering the triangle mesh in the 3D View window: 180 Enhanced Mesh Creator What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

187 If you cannot see the settings in the Advanced area, click on the arrow icon to display them. If you want to view the triangle mesh as a wireframe image, click to select the Wireframe option. Triangles viewed from the front are shown in blue, while triangles viewed from the back are shown in red. If you want to view the triangle mesh as a shaded image, click to select the Shaded option. The Modelling Default shading options are used, unless you have changed them using the Lights and Material page. 9. If you want to smooth the triangles in the resulting mesh: First make sure that the Smooth Triangles option is selected. Next define the angle of each triangle in the Smooth Angle box. You can also smooth a replica mesh directly from the Project Tree using the Smooth option in the context-menu displayed by right-clicking on a replica mesh. When using this method, an angle of 17 degrees is always used. 10. If you want to save the triangle mesh: First click on the Save Triangles... button to display the Export Mesh As... dialog box: Next click on the Save in list box and select the location on your computer in which you want to save the triangle mesh file. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Mesh Creator 181

188 Type a name for the triangle mesh in the File name box. Now click on the Save as type list box, followed by the file type in which you want to save the triangle mesh. You can export the triangle mesh as an ArtCAM Assembly (*.3da), Binary STL (*.stl), ASCII STL (*.stl), Wavefront Object (*.obj) or Delcam Machining Triangles (*.dmt) file only. Finally click on the Save button to close the dialog box and save the triangle mesh file. 11. If you want to add the triangle mesh to the Project Tree: First click on the Add To Project button. A message box is displayed confirming that the triangle mesh has been added to the project: Click on the OK button to close the message box. A new assembly is created as the last item beneath the Root Assembly, and the replica mesh is directly associated with this. Both the new assembly and the replica mesh adopt the name that was defined in the Assembly Name box prior to clicking on the Create Triangles button. The Save Triangles..., Copy To Clipboard and Add To Project buttons are greyed-out immediately after the Add To Project has been used. If you want to export the same triangle mesh or copy it to the ArtCAM clipboard after clicking on the Add To Project button, use the contextmenu associated with the replica mesh in the Project Tree. For details, see Exporting a Replica Mesh (on page 122) and Copying and Pasting an Item (on page 29). Next click on the Project tab to display the Project Tree. Now click on the expand icon beside the new assembly in the Project Tree to display its associated replica mesh. If you want to associate the triangle mesh with a particular assembly already in the Project Tree: 182 Enhanced Mesh Creator What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

189 First click on the Copy to Clipboard button. A message box is displayed confirming that the triangle mesh has been copied to the ArtCAM clipboard: Click on the OK button to close the message box. If you are working on a model independently, the Copy to Clipboard button is always greyed-out. Next click on the Project tab to display the Project Tree. Now right-click on the Root Assembly or assembly in the Project Tree beneath which you want to add the replica mesh to display its context-menu, and then click on the Paste menu option. For further details, see Copying and Pasting an Item (on page 29). The replica mesh is added directly beneath the selected assembly, and adopts the name of the ArtCAM model from which it originates. 12. If you have added the triangle mesh into the Project Tree, click on the Assistant tab to return to the Mesh Creator page. 13. Click on the Close button to return to the Assistant's Home page. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Mesh Creator 183

190 Enhanced Two-Rail Ring Sweep Tool You can create a two-rail swept ring shape using multiple vectors. The first two vectors define the lines along which the shape is extruded. They are referred to as the drive rails. You can use any number of vectors as cross-sections in the shape. Each of the vectors that you select as crosssections can be associated with a specific position along each of the drive rails (the vectors along which the swept ring shape is extruded). You can also use a vector created around the Reference Silhouette to determine the height of the shape in the Z direction. You can now control the direction of the vectors that you have selected as the drive rails when creating the two-rail swept ring shape. To create a two-rail swept ring shape: 1. Make sure that the relief layer onto which you want to create the two rail swept ring shape is selected. 2. Click on the Two Rail Sweep - Ring button in the Rotary Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home page to display the Two Rail Ring Sweep page. 3. Click to select the first vector along which you want the crosssection to be swept, and then click on the Select button for the Top Drive Rail in the Select Control Vectors area. The selected vector is referred as the first drive rail. In the Status area, the First Drive Rail status changes from Not Selected to Valid. A red letter A is displayed beside the first drive rail in the 2D View window. 184 Enhanced Two-Rail Ring Sweep Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

191 4. Click to select the second vector along which you want the crosssection to be swept, and then click on the Select button for the Bottom Drive Rail in the Select Control Vectors area. The selected vector is referred to as the second drive rail. In the Status area, the Second Drive Rail status changes from Not Selected to Valid. A red letter B is displayed beside the second drive rail in the 2D View window. Arrows are displayed on the two vectors selected as the drive rails to indicate their direction. 5. Click to select the open, ungrouped vector that you want to use as the cross-section in the swept ring shape, and then click on the Add Cross Section button in the Status area. In the Status area, Cross Section 1 is now listed with its status as Valid. The number of spans that make up the cross-section are also shown. A red number 1 is displayed beside the cross-section in the 2D View window. If you have selected a closed or grouped vector as a cross-section, a message box is displayed indicating that you have selected an invalid vector and instructs you to select a single ungrouped vector. Click on the OK button to close the message box, and then repeat this step using an open and ungrouped vector. If you want to use multiple cross-sections in the swept ring shape, hold down the Shift key on your keyboard, click to select each of the open, ungrouped vectors that you want to use, and then click on the Add Cross Section button. In the Cross Section area, each of the selected cross-sections is numbered sequentially and its status is shown as Valid. Each of the cross-sections selected in the 2D View window is also numbered sequentially in red. When selecting two or more cross-sections, each of the selected open vectors you use should ideally contain the same number of spans. This will make for a smooth transition in the shape between each cross-section. A red number marks the position of each cross section along the first drive rail in the 2D View window. The position of each cross section along the first drive rail is numbered sequentially. A blue number marks the position of each cross section along the second drive rail in the 2D View window. The position of each cross-section along the second drive rail is numbered sequentially. If you want to adjust the position of any of the cross-sections along either of the drive rails, for each of them: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Two-Rail Ring Sweep Tool 185

192 Click on the Set Position button. The Set Position button changes to and the Position label changes to 1st Rail. Click on the position along the first drive rail that you want to use for the cross-section. The 1st Rail label changes to 2nd Rail. Click on the position along the second drive rail that you want to use for the cross-section. The Set Position button changes to and the 2nd Rail label changes to Position. By default, ArtCAM JewelSmith creates a smooth blended shape between each cross-section made up of an equal number of spans. If you would rather a linear blended shape is used, click on the Smooth Blend button. The Linear Blend button is displayed in its place. If you want to cancel the use of any of the selected cross-sections, click on the Delete button for each of the cross-sections that you do not want to use. If all of the vectors selected as cross-sections contain the same number of spans, the Sweep between spans option is activated and selected by default. This instructs ArtCAM JewelSmith to sweep between matching spans. If you do not want to sweep between matching spans, click to deselect the Sweep between spans option. If you do not want to duplicate the selected cross-sections on the opposite side of the swept ring shape, click to deselect the Ring is symmetrical option. This option is selected by default. 6. Make sure that the direction of the two vectors that you have selected as drive rails is the same: If you need to reverse the direction of the first drive rail, click to select the First option in the Reverse Direction of Drive Rails area. If you need to reverse the direction of the second drive rail, click to select the Second option. 7. You are now ready to decide how you want to scale the swept ring shape. If you want to scale the two-rail swept profile in the Z-axis along its length: 186 Enhanced Two-Rail Ring Sweep Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

193 Click to select the closed vector that you want to use to control the Z height of the swept ring shape, and then on the Select button for the Ring Silhouette in the Select Control Vectors area. The selected vector is typically that which is drawn using the Reference Silhouette. The selected vector is referred to as the Ring Silhouette. In the Status area, the Ring Silhouette status changes from Not Selected to Valid. A red letter Z is displayed beside the Ring Silhouette in the 2D View window. Next make sure that the Silhouette Vector Controls Z option is selected. This option is selected by default whenever a Ring Silhouette vector is selected. The Scale Height with Width and Scale Final Height options are greyed-out. If you do not want to use the ring silhouette to determine the height of the swept ring shape, you can select an alternative scaling option: First click to deselect the Silhouette Vector Controls Z option. The Scale Height with Width and Scale Final Height options are activated, and the red letter Z beside the Ring Silhouette is removed. To scale the height of the cross-section across the two drive rails in proportion with its width, make sure that the Scale Height with Width option is selected. If you want the height of the cross-section across the two drive rails to remain constant, click to deselect the Scale Height with Width option. Narrow sections in the swept shape appear low, while wide sections appear high when the Scale Height with Width option is selected. To define the final height of the swept ring shape before it is combined with the selected relief layer, click to select the Scale Final Height option, and then define its height in the adjacent box. If you have selected the Silhouette Vector Controls Z option, then the Scale Height with Width and Scale Final Height options are greyed-out. 8. In the Combine area, select the Relief Combine Mode that you want to use: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Two-Rail Ring Sweep Tool 187

194 Click on the Add radio button if you want to add the two-rail swept ring shape to the selected relief layer. Click on the Subtract radio button if you want to subtract the two-rail swept ring shape from the selected relief layer. Click on the Highest radio button if you want to merge the two-rail swept ring shape with the selected relief layer, so that only the highest points show. Click on the Lowest radio button if you want to merge the two-rail swept ring shape with the selected relief layer, so that only the lowest points show. 9. Click on the Calculate button to combine the two-rail swept ring shape with the selected relief layer. 10. Click on the Close button to return to the Assistant's Home page. New Vector Boundary Tool You can now create vector boundaries from the composite relief or a selected relief layer. The resulting vector artwork can be used as an efficient machining boundary in several toolpaths, a boundary for envelope distortion, smoothing, applying texture or scaling, and for cleaning-up scanned data. To create vector boundaries: 1. Click on the Create Vector Boundary From Relief button in the Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home page to display the Create Vector Boundary page. 188 New Vector Boundary Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

195 2. Select the source relief from which you want to create vector boundaries. If you want to create vector boundaries around the content on a specific relief layer: Make sure that the relief layer containing the shape around which you want to create vector boundaries is both visible and selected. Select the Selected Relief Layer option by clicking on its radio button. If you want to create vector boundaries around the composite relief: Make sure that all of the relief layers that make up the composite relief around which you want to create vector boundaries are visible. Select the Composite Relief option by clicking on its radio button. 3. If you want to create vector boundaries around a specific area of the source relief: Click to select the Use Height Range option. The Min Height box is now active. Define the lowest point in the source relief at which you want ArtCAM JewelSmith to create vector boundaries in the Min Height box. You can see the exact height of the composite relief directly beneath the mouse cursor by looking at the value shown in the Z area beneath the Layers and Add In tabs: If you want to limit the height at which ArtCAM JewelSmith creates vector boundaries, click to select the Use Max Height option. The Max Height box is now active. Define the highest point in the source relief at which you want to create vector boundaries in the Max Height box. 4. Make sure that the vector layer on which you want to draw the resulting vector boundaries is selected. 5. Click on the Create Boundary button to calculate the vector boundaries around the source relief. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New Vector Boundary Tool 189

196 A progress bar is displayed in the status bar area during the calculation process: The resulting vector boundaries are magenta and surrounded by a bounding box; indicating that it is both ungrouped and selected. For example, the vector boundaries resulting from a composite lizard relief are drawn as follows: The lizard relief has a maximum Z height of mm. If we select the Use Height Range option, then define a height of 8 mm in the Min Height box, the resulting vector boundaries are drawn as follows: 6. Click on the Close button to return to the Assistant's Home page. 190 New Vector Boundary Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

197 Enhanced Interactive Sculpting You can now limit the reach of any of the tools available when sculpting the composite relief. This is particularly useful for engraving work which demands a strict Z range. To set the position in the composite relief beneath which the sculpting is prohibited: 1. Make sure that Lock Zero Plane option is selected. 2. Define the height at which you want to set the zero plane in the composite relief in the box below. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Interactive Sculpting 191

198 Enhanced Lights and Material Settings There are two new options available in the Shading Setup list box. The Modelling Default and Simulation Default options replace the Default option available in previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith. The settings associated with the Default option available in previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith are now named Old Default. You can store custom settings as the Modelling Default and the Simulation Default so that these are used when viewing the composite relief and simulated toolpaths in the 3D View window. 192 Enhanced Lights and Material Settings What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

199 New Relief Layer Thumbnails In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, it was not possible to determine the content on a specific relief layer unless it was actually visible in the 3D View window. Each relief layer now has its own thumbnail image, allowing you to check its content irrespective of whether it is currently visible in the 3D View window or not. This is particularly valuable when a composite relief is made up of a large number of relief layers. To preview the content on a specific relief layer: 1. Move the mouse cursor over the thumbnail image to the left of the Relief Combine Mode toolset associated with the relief layer in the stack shown in the Reliefs area of the Layers Manager. The thumbnail image is magnified to display the content on the relief layer more clearly. The dimensions of the original thumbnail image associated with each relief layer are 17 x 17 pixels. The dimensions of the magnified thumbnail image are 100 x 100 pixels. A relief layer does not need to be selected in order for its magnified thumbnail image to be displayed. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New Relief Layer Thumbnails 193

200 The thumbnail image, either in its original or magnified state, is a scaled-to-fit isometric view of the relief layer as if it were shown alone in the 3D View window. The thumbnail view does not adopt the view orientation applied to the actual 3D View window. If you move the mouse cursor up or down vertically in line with the column of thumbnail images in the relief layer stack, the visible magnified thumbnail image is immediately updated. New Slice Relief Tool The new Slice Relief tool allows you to divide the composite relief or the content on a single relief layer into slices. The depth of each slice is typically equal to the thickness of the sheet(s) of material available for a particular job. To slice either the composite relief or a selected relief layer: 1. Click on the Cut Visible Relief Into Slices button in the Relief Tools area of the Assistant's Home page to display the Slice Relief page. 194 New Slice Relief Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

201 The current dimensions of the composite relief are shown in the Relief area of the page. The composite relief is the sum of all visible relief layers in the layer stack shown in the Reliefs area of the Layers Manager. 2. Select the slicing method that you want to use. If you want to divide the content on a specific relief layer into slices: Make sure that the relief layer that you want to divide into slices is both visible and selected. Select the Selected Relief Layer option by clicking on its radio button. If you want to divide the composite relief into slices: Make sure that all of the relief layers that make up the composite relief that you want to divide into slices are visible. Select the Composite Relief option by clicking on its radio button. 3. Define the thickness of the material sheet on which you want to machine each of the resulting slices in the Material Thickness box. 4. Click on the Slice Relief button to slice either the selected relief layer or composite relief into layers equal to the defined material thickness. A progress bar is displayed in the status bar area indicating the progress ArtCAM JewelSmith is making in calculating the slices. The total shown in the Slices to be created area counts down each time a new slice is created. Each slice is created on a separate relief layer in the Reliefs area of the Layers Manager. Each new relief layer is added to the top of the layer stack and numbered consecutively by default. 5. Click on the Close button to return to the Assistant's Home page. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New Slice Relief Tool 195

202 Enhanced Machine Relief Toolpath The following enhancements have been added to the Machine Relief toolpath: Machining within an Automatic Boundary. This allows you to machine as closely as possible to the composite relief above or below its base height using a chosen tool. ArtCAM JewelSmith calculates a boundary vector using the tool geometry. The 3D Offset machining strategy. This produces a toolpath where the stepover is consistent when machining the composite relief, irrespective of direction. This technique is best suited to machining areas which require a constant stepover and works well on steep and near vertical surfaces. The 3D Offset Spiral machining strategy. This produces a spiral toolpath where the stepover is consistent when machining the composite relief, irrespective of direction. This minimises the number of lifts of the tool and maximises cutting time while maintaining more constant load conditions and deflections on the tool. To machine the surface of the composite relief: 1. Click on the Toolpaths tab to display the Toolpaths Home page. 2. Click on the Machine Relief button in the 3D Toolpaths area to display the Machine Relief page in the Assistant window. 196 Enhanced Machine Relief Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

203 3. Select one of the Area To Machine options to control how the composite relief is machined: Click on the Composite Relief radio button if you want to machine the whole of the composite relief. If you have chosen this option, make sure that all of the relief layers that make up the composite relief you want to machine are visible. Click on the Selected Vector radio button if you want to machine an area of the composite relief within the boundary of a selected closed vector. If you have chosen this option, click to select the closed vector shown in the 2D View window that defines the area of the composite relief that you want to machine. Click on the Automatic Boundary radio button if you want to machine as closely as possible to the composite relief when using a specific tool. ArtCAM JewelSmith calculates a boundary vector using the tool geometry. If you have chosen this option, define any offset that you want to apply to the calculated boundary in the Offset box below. If you select a tool from the Tool Database using the Select... button in the Tool area, you can then click on the Preview button to calculate the boundary vector used to machine the composite relief. A progress bar is displayed in the status bar area during the calculation process: The resulting vector boundary is drawn on the currently selected vector layer in green and is surrounded by a bounding box; indicating that it is both locked and selected. 4. Click on the Strategy list box to display the strategies available according to the chosen machining area, followed by the strategy that you want to use. If you have selected the Composite Relief option, then you can choose from the following strategies: Raster in X - This strategy machines back and forth along the X-axis at a specified angle. Raster in X and Y - This strategy machines in two perpendicular directions at a specified angle. This strategy improves the surface finish but can also be time consuming. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Machine Relief Toolpath 197

204 Spiral - This strategy machines in a spiral motion. When the tool reaches the first edge of the composite relief it retracts, traverses along the edge of the composite relief and then plunges to continue machining the next area of the composite relief. This strategy allows you to machine the entire composite relief but can also be time consuming. Spiral in Box - This strategy machines in a spiral motion. When the tool reaches the first edge of the composite relief it retracts, traverses along the edge of the composite relief and then plunges to continue machining the next area of the composite relief. This strategy allows you to machine the entire composite relief but can also be time consuming. 3D Offset - This strategy creates a toolpath where the stepover is consistent when machining the composite relief, irrespective of direction. This technique is best suited to machining areas which require a constant stepover and works well on steep and near vertical surfaces. 3D Offset Spiral - This strategy produces a spiral toolpath where the stepover is consistent when machining the composite relief, irrespective of direction. This minimises the number of lifts of the tool and maximises cutting time while maintaining more constant load conditions and deflections on the tool. If you have selected the Selected Vector or Automatic Boundary option, then you can choose from the following strategies: Raster - This strategy machines back and forth at a specified angle. Offset - This strategy machines in repeated passes, each time moving inwards by the stepover value of the tool you use. You can see the stepover associated with the selected tool when the machining parameters are displayed in the Tool area. 3D Offset - This strategy creates a toolpath where the stepover is consistent when machining the composite relief, irrespective of direction. This technique is best suited to machining areas which require a constant stepover and works well on steep and near vertical surfaces. 198 Enhanced Machine Relief Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

205 3D Offset Spiral - This strategy produces a spiral toolpath where the stepover is consistent when machining the composite relief, irrespective of direction. This minimises the number of lifts of the tool and maximises cutting time while maintaining more constant load conditions and deflections on the tool. 5. If you have selected a Raster strategy: Define the angle at which you want the tool to move in the Raster Angle box. You can set the default raster angle used in all toolpaths using the ArtCAM Options page. To leave additional material on the surface of the composite relief to allow for the final machining pass, define the amount in the Allowance box. Define how closely you want the cutting tool to follow the shape of the composite relief in the Tolerance box. 6. If you have selected an Offset, 3D Offset or 3D Offset Spiral strategy: The Cutting Direction defaults to Climb Mill. Climb milling rotates the cutting tool in the same direction as the feed motion. If you want to change this, select the Conventional option by clicking on its radio button. You can set the default cutting direction used in all toolpaths using the ArtCAM Options page. The Start Point defaults to Inside. This means that machining begins from the middle and moves outwards. If you want to begin from the boundary and machine inwards, select the Outside option by clicking on its radio button. If you want to restrict the reach of the offset machining passes, click to select the Limit Offset Distance option and then define how far the final pass of the offset toolpath is from the boundary vector in the Distance box below. To leave additional material on the surface of the composite relief to allow for the final machining pass, define the amount in the Allowance box. Define how closely you want the cutting tool to follow the shape of the composite relief in the Tolerance box. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Machine Relief Toolpath 199

206 7. If you want to change the height at which the machining tool makes rapid moves between toolpath segments: First click on the arrow icon in the Machine Safe Z area to display the Safe Z box and the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes. Next define the height in the Safe Z box. If you want to define the Home Position for the machining tool: First define its position along the X, Y and Z axes in the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes. Next click on the arrow icon to hide the Safe Z box and the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes. 8. Click on the Select... button in the Tool area to open the Tool Database: 9. Double-click on the tool that you want to use. ArtCAM JewelSmith closes the Tool Database and displays the selected tool's description in the Tool area of the Machine Relief page. If you want to amend the machining parameters associated with the selected tool, click on the arrow icon in the Tool area. When you have finished, click on the arrow icon to hide the machining parameters. 200 Enhanced Machine Relief Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

207 If you have selected the Automatic Boundary option in the Area To Machine area, you can now click on the Preview button to calculate the boundary vector used to machine the composite relief. A progress bar is displayed in the status bar area during the calculation process: The resulting vector boundary is drawn on the currently selected vector layer in green and is surrounded by a bounding box; indicating that it is both locked and selected. 10. If you want the selected tool to make several Z passes during the machining process: First click to select the Do Multiple Z Passes option. Next define the height at which the tool enters the block of material in the Z Height of First Pass box. Next define the height at which the tool exits the block of matieral in Z Height of Last Pass box. The actual number of passes made between these two heights is determined by the Stepdown associated with the selected tool. 11. If you want to add ramping moves to the toolpath: First click to select the Add Ramping Moves option. The ramping moves settings are displayed. If you do not want to use any of the four ramping moves settings, click to deselect the option(s) you do not require. Next define the maximum angle of descent for each zig and zag movement of the selected tool in the Max Ramp Angle (A) box. Now define the maximum distance along which you want the selected tool to zigzag across the surface of the composite relief in the Max Ramp Length (L) box. Next define the minimum distance along which you want the selected tool to zigzag across the surface of the composite relief in the Min Ramp Length (Lmin) box. Define the height at which the ramping moves begin in the Ramp Start Height (S) box. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Machine Relief Toolpath 201

208 If you deselect the Ramp Start Height (S) option, ArtCAM JewelSmith uses the value in the Safe Z box in the Machine Safe Z area instead. 12. If your material settings are undefined, click on the Setup... button in the Material area to display the Material Setup dialog box. If you have previously defined your material settings, the material thickness is shown in the Material area. Click on the arrow icon in the Material area to view the material Z zero position and the Z height of both the top and bottom of the block. 13. Type the name that you want to give the toolpath in the Name box. If you do not give the toolpath a name, the Machine Relief label is used by default. 14. You can now specify when you want to calculate the toolpath: If you want to calculate the toolpath now, click on the Now button. A progress bar is displayed in the status bar area during the calculation process: You can click on the Cancel button to end the calculation process at any time. If you want to calculate the toolpath either independently or as part of a batch of toolpaths at a later time, click on the Later button. 15. Click on the Close button to return to the Toolpaths Home page. The toolpath is listed on the Toolpaths Home page. If the toolpath name is shown in black, this indicates that the toolpath has already been calculated. If it is shown in red, this indicates that the toolpath has not yet been calculated. When calculated, a wireframe view of the toolpath is shown in the 3D View window by default. 202 Enhanced Machine Relief Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

209 Enhanced Feature Machining Toolpath In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, each of the three types of feature available in ArtCAM JewelSmith had its own separate button in the 3D Toolpaths area of the Toolpaths page, each with its own corresponding page of settings. Once created, any of these features could be selected from a list box on the Feature Machining page at the time of creating a toolpath. All of the settings originally found on the Create Raised Feature, Create Recessed Feature and Create Centreline Feature pages have now been consolidated on the Feature Machining page. As a result the Raised Feature, Recessed Feature, Centreline Feature and Return Feature To Normal Vectors button have all been removed from the 3D Toolpaths area: The Choose Feature list box on the Feature Machining page itself has also been removed: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Feature Machining Toolpath 203

210 The following enhancements have also been made to the Feature Machining toolpath: When creating a raised or recessed feature using and angled Feature Tool, you can extend the sharpening of the external corners to the bottom of the feature. In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, you could only sharpen the external corners at the top of a feature. A copy of the vector artwork from which the feature is created is pasted onto a new vector layer directly above the currently selected vector layer. This new vector layer is named Feature Vectors by default. In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, the vector artwork chosen for a particular feature became a 'feature vector'. To create a feature: 1. Click on the Toolpaths tab to display the Toolpaths Home page. 2. Click on the Feature Machining button in the 3D Toolpaths area to display the Feature Machining page in the Assistant window. 3. Select the vector artwork shown in the 2D View from which you want to create a feature. 4. Select the type of feature that you want to create by clicking on the appropriate radio button in the Type of Feature area: If you want to create a raised feature, click to select the Raised Feature option. If you want to create a recessed feature, click to select the Recessed Feature option. If you want to create a centreline feature, click to select the Centre Line Feature option. 5. If you have selected the Raised Feature option: Define the height of the raised feature in the Feature Height box. If you want to add or remove extra material around the vector artwork used for the feature, define the allowance in the Feature Allowance box. The Feature Allowance option is greyed-out when the Outer vector defines machining limit option is selected. 204 Enhanced Feature Machining Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

211 If the vector artwork used for the feature contains a central cavity that you want to remove with your chosen Feature Tool, make sure that the Clear inner islands option is selected. The Clear inner islands option is greyed-out when the Outer vector defines machining limit option is selected. If you do not select this option, the Feature Tool can only remove material inside of a central cavity as far as the Feature Allowance and/or Overcut Distance allow. If you select this option, any Feature Allowance and/or Overcut Distance that you define is ignored by the Feature Tool used to machine the raised feature. If you want to leave an allowance around the vector artwork used for the feature, including any associated central cavity, make sure that the Use constant allowance around vector option is selected by clicking on its radio button. If you want to machine around the boundary of the vector artwork used for the feature, make sure that the Outer vector defines machining limit option is selected. If the vector artwork contains a central cavity, the cavity is not removed when using this option. When the Outer vector defines machining limit option is selected, the Feature Allowance and Clear inner islands options are greyed-out. If you want to sharpen the external corners at the top of the feature, providing that you choose an angled Feature Tool, make sure that the Sharpen At Top option is selected. If you want to extend the sharpening of the external corners to the bottom of the feature, providing that you choose an angled Feature Tool, make sure that the Sharpen At Bottom option is selected. When the Vector at Bottom Edge option is selected, the Sharpen At Top and Sharpen At Bottom options are greyed-out. ArtCAM JewelSmith extends the sharpening of the external corners to the bottom of the feature by default when the Vector at Bottom Edge option is selected. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Feature Machining Toolpath 205

212 If you want the selected Feature Tool to be in contact with the top edge of the vector artwork used for the feature during the machining process, select the Vector at Top Edge option by clicking on its radio button. If you want the selected Feature Tool to be in contact with the bottom edge of the vector artwork used for the feature during the machining process, select the Vector at Bottom Edge option by clicking on its radio button. 6. If you have selected the Recessed Feature option: Define the depth of the recessed feature in the Feature Depth box. If you want to sharpen the external corners at the top of the feature, providing that you choose an angled Feature Tool, make sure that the Sharpen At Top option is selected. If you want to extend the sharpening of the external corners to the bottom of the feature, providing that you choose an angled Feature Tool, make sure that the Sharpen At Bottom option is selected. When the Vector at Bottom Edge option is selected, the Sharpen At Bottom option is greyed-out. If you want the selected Feature Tool to be in contact with the top edge of the vector artwork used for the feature during the machining process, select the Vector at Top Edge option by clicking on its radio button. If you want the selected Feature Tool to be in contact with the bottom edge of the vector artwork used for the feature during the machining process, select the Vector at Bottom Edge option by clicking on its radio button. 7. If you have selected the Centre Line Feature option: Define the depth of the centre line feature in the Feature Depth box. 8. Choose the strategy that you want to use during the machining process: If you only want the Feature Tool to make profile passes around the vector artwork used for the feature, select the Profile Only option by clicking on its radio button. 206 Enhanced Feature Machining Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

213 If you have selected the Profile Only machining strategy, define any offset that you want to apply above the surface of the composite relief in the Allowance box. If you want the Feature Tool to clear an area of material within the boundary of the vector artwork used for the feature and then make profile passes around the boundary, select the Area Clear option by clicking on its radio button. The vector artwork used for the feature is not machined using the Area Clear strategy. A protected area is created around the vector artwork during the machining process. If you have selected the Area Clear machining strategy, define the in the Overcut Distance box to remove any ridge of unwanted material that remains around the machined feature. The value in the Overcut Distance box should normally be equal to the radius of the Feature Tool used in the Area Clear strategy. 9. To complete the strategy that you have selected as a series of passes in the Z direction, click to select the Do Multiple Z Passes option. Its associated options are displayed. Define the number of Z passes that you want to make in the Num Slices box. To evenly distribute the number of Z passes through the block of material, click on the Linear Spacing button. To add another Z pass, click on the Add button. For each click, a new value appears in the main box and value shown in the Num Slices box increases sequentially. To delete a Z pass, click to select a value in the main box and then click on the Delete button. For each click, the selected value is removed from the main box and the Num Slices box decreases sequentially. To change any of the values shown in the main box, click to select the value that you want to edit, define the new value in the Update box and then click on the Update button. To delete all of the current values displayed in each of the boxes, click on the Clear All button. 10. Define how the Feature Tool reaches the depth associated with the feature: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Feature Machining Toolpath 207

214 If you want ArtCAM JewelSmith to conduct a check for the probability of a collision between the tool geometry and the material surface before the tool descends to the cutting depth, select the Drop Tool option by clicking on its radio button. If a collision is anticipated, ArtCAM JewelSmith avoids this by adjusting the cutting depth. This can prevent the problem of gouging. If you want to allow the Feature Tool to descend to the cutting depth, ignoring any probability of a collision between the tool geometry and the material surface, select the Project Tool option by clicking on its radio button. The Project Tool option can cause gouging in the material surface around the edge of the selected Feature Tool. 11. Select the cutting direction that you want to use during the machining process: If you want the Feature Tool to rotate in the same direction as the feed motion, select the Climb option by clicking on its radio button. If you want the Feature Tool to rotate in the opposite direction to the feed motion, select the Conventional option by clicking on its radio button. You can set the default cutting direction using the ArtCAM Options page. 12. Define how closely you want the Feature Tool to follow the shape of the vector artwork used for the feature in the Tolerance box. 13. If you want to change the height at which the Feature Tool makes rapid moves between toolpath segments: First click on the arrow icon in the Machine Safe Z area to display the Safe Z box and the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes. Next define the height in the Safe Z box. If you want to define the Home Position for the Feature Tool: First define its position along the X, Y and Z axes in the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes. Next click on the arrow icon to hide the Safe Z box and the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes. 208 Enhanced Feature Machining Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

215 14. Click on the Select... button in the Feature Tool area to open the Tool Database: 15. Double-click on the tool that you want to use. ArtCAM JewelSmith closes the Tool Database and displays the selected tool's description in the Feature Tool area. If you want to amend the machining parameters associated with the selected tool, click on the arrow icon in the Feature Tool area. When you have finished, click on the arrow icon to hide the machining parameters. 16. If your material settings are undefined, click on the Setup... button in the Material area to display the Material Setup dialog box. If you have previously defined your material settings, the material thickness is shown in the Material area. Click on the arrow icon in the Material area to view the material Z zero position and the Z height of both the top and bottom of the block. 17. Type a name for the toolpath in the Name box. 18. You can now specify when you want to calculate the toolpath: If you want to calculate the toolpath now, click on the Now button. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Feature Machining Toolpath 209

216 A copy of the vector artwork from which the feature is created is pasted onto a new vector layer directly above the currently selected vector layer. This new vector layer is named Feature Vectors by default. The vector artwork is shown in blue when deselected, regardless of whichever colour is assigned to the vector layer. The feature itself is created on either the front or back surface of your design, depending on which layer stack is selected in the list box shown in the Reliefs area of the Layers Manager. If you want to calculate the toolpath as part of a batch of toolpaths at a later time, click on the Later button. 19. Click on the Close button to return to the Toolpaths Home page. Enhanced Z Level Roughing Toolpath The following enhancements have been added to the Machine Relief toolpath: Machining within an Automatic Boundary. This allows you to machine as closely as possible to the composite relief above or below its base height using a chosen tool. ArtCAM JewelSmith calculates a boundary vector using the tool geometry. Use the Z dimensions of the composite relief to control the position of the Start/Surface Z and Last Slice Z. To remove a cross-section of the composite relief in the Z direction: 1. Click on the Toolpaths tab to display the Toolpaths Home page. 210 Enhanced Z Level Roughing Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

217 2. Click on the Z Level Roughing button in the 3D Toolpaths area to display the Z Level Roughing page in the Assistant window. 3. Select one of the Area To Machine options to control how the composite relief is machined: Click on the Composite Relief radio button if you want to remove material across the entire surface of the composite relief. If you have chosen this option, make sure that all of the relief layers that make up the composite relief you want to machine are visible. Click on the Selected Vector radio button if you want to remove material froman area of the composite relief within the boundary of a selected closed vector. If you have chosen this option, click to select the closed vector shown in the 2D View window that defines the area of the material that you want to remove from the composite relief. Click on the Automatic Boundary radio button if you want to machine as closely as possible to the composite relief when using a specific tool. ArtCAM JewelSmith calculates a boundary vector using the tool geometry. If you have chosen this option, define any offset that you want to apply to the calculated boundary in the Offset box below. If you select a tool from the Tool Database using the Select... button in the Roughing Tool area, the boundary vector used to machine the composite relief is calculated immediately. A progress bar is displayed in the status bar area during the calculation process: The resulting vector boundary is drawn on the currently selected vector layer in green and is surrounded by a bounding box; indicating that it is both locked and selected. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Z Level Roughing Toolpath 211

218 4. Click on the Select... button in the Tool area to open the Tool Database: 5. Double-click on the tool that you want to use. ArtCAM JewelSmith closes the Tool Database and displays the selected tool's description in the Roughing Tool area of the Z Level Roughing page. It is recommended that you choose an End Mill tool for Z Level Roughing. If you want to amend the machining parameters associated with the selected tool, click on the arrow icon in the Roughing Tool area. When you have finished, click on the arrow icon to hide the machining parameters. 6. If you want to add ramping moves to the toolpath: First click to select the Add Ramping Moves option. The ramping moves settings are displayed. If you do not want to use any of the four ramping moves settings, click to deselect the option(s) you do not require. Next define the maximum angle of descent for each zig and zag movement of the selected tool in the Max Ramp Angle (A) box. 212 Enhanced Z Level Roughing Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

219 Now define the maximum distance along which you want the selected tool to zigzag across the surface of the composite relief in the Max Ramp Length (L) box. Next define the minimum distance along with you want the selected tool to zigzag across the surface of the composite relief in the Min Ramp Length (Lmin) box. Define the height at which the ramping moves begin in the Ramp Start Height (S) box. If you deselect the Ramp Start Height (S) option, ArtCAM JewelSmith uses the value in the Safe Z box in the Machine Safe Z area instead. 7. If your material settings are undefined, click on the Setup... button in the Material area to display the Material Setup dialog box. If you have previously defined your material settings, the material thickness is shown in the Material area. Click on the arrow in the Material area to view the material Z zero position and the Z height of both the top and bottom of the block. 8. If you want to control the number of Z passes used to machine between the top of the material block and the lowest point in the composite relief: If you want the Z dimensions of the composite relief to decide the position of the first and last slice, click to select the Use Model Limits option. The Start/Surface Z and Last Slice Z boxes are greyed-out. First define the position of the first Z slice in the Start/Surface Z box. If the Use Model Limits option is selected, this box is greyed-out. The value shown is equal to the top of the material block or the maximum Z height in the composite relief where the material setup has not been defined. Next if you want to leave additional material on the surface of the composite relief for a finishing tool to remove, define the amount in the Material Allowance box. The allowance sets the distance between the surface of the composite relief and the Roughing Tool. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Z Level Roughing Toolpath 213

220 If you define the Material Allowance as zero, this can cause dwell marks to remain on the material surface after the final machining pass. ArtCAM JewelSmith therefore applies an allowance of 0.05 mm or inches to the last Z slice. Now define the position of the last Z slice in the Last Slice Z box. If the Use Model Limits option is selected, this box is greyed-out. The value shown is equal to the minimum Z height in the composite relief plus any defined Material Allowance. Finally click on the Apply button to calculate the number of slices and their thickness based on your settings. The resulting number of slices and the thickness of each of them is shown in the Z Slices area. 9. If you want to change the height at which the machining tool makes rapid moves between toolpath segments: First click on the arrow icon in the Machine Safe Z area to display the Safe Z box, the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes and the Tolerance box. Next define the height in the Safe Z box. If you want to define the Home Position for the machining tool: Define the co-ordinates of its position along the X, Y and Z axes in the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes. If you want to define how closely you want to the machining tool to follow the shape of the composite relief: First define the tolerance that you want to apply in the Tolerance box. Next click on the arrow icon to hide the Safe Z box, the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes and the Tolerance box. 10. In the Strategy area, select the machining strategy that you want to use by clicking on either of the radio buttons: Select the Raster option if you want to machine back and forth along the X-axis at a specified angle. Select the Offset option if you want to machine in repeated passes, each time moving by a distance equal to the Stepover value of the selected Roughing Tool. 214 Enhanced Z Level Roughing Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

221 The stepover of the selected tool must be less than its diameter. If you have selected the Raster strategy: Define the angle at which you want the tool to move in the Raster Angle box. You can set the default raster angle used in all toolpaths using the ArtCAM Options page. If you want do not want the tool to profile the composite relief, select the None option by clicking on its radio button. If you want the tool to profile and then move inwards to raster clear the composite relief, select the First option by clicking on its radio button. If you want the tool to move outwards to raster clear and then profile the composite relief, select the Last option by clicking on its radio button. If you have selected the Offset strategy: The Cutting Direction defaults to Climb Mill. Climb milling rotates the cutting tool in the same direction as the feed motion. If you want to change this, select the Conventional option by clicking on its radio button. You can set the default cutting direction used in all toolpaths using the ArtCAM Options page. The Start Point defaults to Inside. This means that machining begins from the middle and moves outwards. If you want to begin from the boundary and machine inwards, select the Outside option by clicking on its radio button. 11. Type the name that you want to give the toolpath in the Name box. If you do not give the toolpath a name, the Z Roughing label is used by default. 12. You can now specify when you want to calculate the toolpath: If you want to calculate the toolpath now, click on the Now button. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Z Level Roughing Toolpath 215

222 If you are using any tool from the Tool Database other than an End Mill, a message box is displayed warning that additional material will remain on the surface of the composite relief in addition to any defined Material Allowance: Click on the OK button to close the message box. If the value in the Stepover box is greater than the diameter associated with the selected Roughing Tool, a message box is displayed warning that the stepover must be less than its diameter: Click on the OK button to close the message box and then edit the stepover associated with the selected Roughing Tool so that it is less than its diameter. A progress bar is displayed in the status bar during the calculation process: You can click on the Cancel button to end the calculation process at any time. If you want to calculate the toolpath either independently or as part of a batch of toolpaths at a later time, click on the Later button. 13. Click on the Close button to return to the Toolpaths Home page. The toolpath is listed on the Toolpaths Home page. If the toolpath name is shown in black, this indicates that the toolpath has already been calculated. If it is shown in red, this indicates that the toolpath has not yet been calculated. When calculated, a wireframe view of the toolpath is shown in the 3D View window by default. 216 Enhanced Z Level Roughing Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

223 Enhanced Smart Engraving Toolpath The overall calculation time for the Smart Engraving toolpath is noticeably faster and its resulting moves are far cleaner. Using the Smart Engraving page you can: Select multiple tools to perform Smart Engraving, where ArtCAM JewelSmith selects the largest tool first and then smaller tools in succession as their size are reduced. This provides the most efficient way of machining, as the larger tools clear unwanted material so that the smaller tools can then machine smaller pockets to produce the engraved detail. Select a different tool clearance strategy for each of your chosen tools. Depending on what strategy you choose, you can control the angle or where and in what direction a tool cuts into the block of material. Control the areas in which an Engraving tool sharpens and profiles. Offset a Roughing tool so to leave sufficient material for an Engraving tool to form the side of the engraved feature. To engrave a selection of vector artwork: 1. Click on the Toolpaths tab to display the Toolpaths Home page. 2. Click on the Engraving button in the 2D Toolpaths area to display the Smart Engraving page in the Assistant window. 3. Select the vector artwork that you want to engrave. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Smart Engraving Toolpath 217

224 4. Define the depth (Z) below the material surface at which you want to begin engraving in the Start Depth box. 5. Define the depth (Z) of the bottom of the cut into the material block in the Finish Depth box. 6. Define how closely you want your chosen Roughing and Engraving tools to follow the shape of the selected vector artwork in the Tolerance box. 7. To place an Engraving tool in contact with the top edge of the selected vector artwork during the machining process, make sure that the Vectors are on surface option is selected. If the Vectors are on surface option is deselected, an Engraving tool is placed in contact with the bottom edge of the selected vector artwork during the machining process and the Offset end mills for engraving tools option is greyed-out. 8. If you are engraving one vector inside of another, and do not want an Engraving tool to sharpen the corners or machine around the boundary of the outer vector, click to select the Outer vectors are boundary option. In the example below, you can see that the Engraving tool machines along the boundary and sharpens the corners of the outer rectangular vector when the Outer vectors are boundary option is selected: Outer Vectors are boundary OFF Outer Vectors are boundary ON 9. To offset an End Mill Roughing tool in order to leave sufficient surface material for an angle-edged Engraving tool to form the side of an engraved feature, click to select the Offset end mills for engraving tools option. 218 Enhanced Smart Engraving Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

225 If you have not selected the Vectors are on surface option, the Offset end mills for engraving tools option cannot be used. 10. If you want to change the height at which your chosen tools make rapid moves between toolpath segments: First click on the arrow icon in the Machine Safe Z area to display the Safe Z box and the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes. Next define the height in the Safe Z box. If you want to define the Home Position for your chosen tools: First define its position along the X, Y and Z axes in the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes. Next click on the arrow icon to hide the Safe Z box and the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes. 11. Click on the Add button in the Tools List area to open the Tool Database: 12. Double-click on the first tool that you want to add to the Tools List. ArtCAM JewelSmith closes the Tool Database, highlights the description of the tool in the Tools List window and also displays its machining parameters. If you want to delete any of the tools listed in the Tools List window, click on the description of the tool that you want to delete followed by the Remove button. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Smart Engraving Toolpath 219

226 If you want to amend any of the machining parameters associated with the selected tool, type the appropriate values in the boxes displayed beneath the tool's description. For example, Stepover. When you have finished, click on the arrow icon next to the tool's description to hide the machining parameters. 13. Repeat the previous two steps until all of the tools that you want to use to machine the selected vector artwork are listed in the Tools List window. 14. Define a machining strategy for each of the tools listed in the Tools List window. To select the tool for which you want to define its machining strategy, you can either: Click on the tool's description in the Tools List window; or Use the and arrow icons to toggle through the list of tools in the Tools List window. The description of the selected tool is highlighted in blue. The machining parameters shown below the Tools List window are updated each time a new tool is selected. 15. If you want to leave additional material around the selected vector artwork, define the distance between the boundary of the vector artwork and the selected tool in the Allowance box. 16. In the Tool Clearance Strategy area, select how you want the selected tool to clear the area within the selected vector artwork by clicking on either of the radio buttons: Select the Raster option if you want to machine back and forth along the X-axis at a specified angle. Select the Offset option if you want to machine in repeated passes, each time moving by a distance equal to the Stepover value of the selected tool. If you have selected the Raster strategy: Define the angle at which you want the selected tool to move in the Raster Angle box. You can set the default raster angle used in all toolpaths using the ArtCAM Options page. If you have selected the Offset strategy: 220 Enhanced Smart Engraving Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

227 The Cutting Direction defaults to Climb Mill. Climb milling rotates the cutting tool in the same direction as the feed motion. If you want to change this, select the Conventional option by clicking on its radio button. You can set the default cutting direction used in all toolpaths using the ArtCAM Options page. 17. Choose the machining options that you want to use for the selected tool: If you want the selected tool to sharpen the corners of the selected vector artwork during the machining process, click to select the Do Corner Sharpening option. The Do Corner Sharpening and Only Smart Engrave Profile options are greyed-out if either the Vectors are on surface option is deselected or if anything other than a V-Bit or Conical tool is currently selected in the Tools List window. In the example below, you can see that the Engraving tool profiles the A vector text to sharpen its corners with the Do Corner Sharpening option is selected. Do Corner Sharpening OFF Do Corner Sharpening ON The Engraving tool is also lifted in the Z direction to minimize the curvature in the corners of the A vector text. If you want the selected tool to profile only the selected vector artwork that has not previously been machined by a larger tool, click to select the Only Smart Engrave Profile option. If you want the selected tool to only make a single profile pass around the selected vector artwork, click to select the Profile Only option. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Smart Engraving Toolpath 221

228 In the example below, you can see that the number of machining passes is reduced when the Profile Only option is selected, particularly in the central cavity of the A vector text: Profile Only OFF Profile Only ON If you want the selected tool to cut at a different depth to other tools, click to select the Independent Finish Depth option then define the absolute Z zero value of the bottom of the area that you want to machine in the Finish Depth box below. 18. If your material settings are undefined, click on the Setup... button in the Material area to display the Material Setup dialog box. If you have previously defined your material settings, the material thickness is shown in the Material area. Click on the arrow icon in the Material area to view the material Z zero position and the Z height of both the top and bottom of the block. 19. If you do not want to preview the toolpath in the 2D View window, click to deselect the Create 2D Preview option. It is recommended that you create a 2D preview. You can always hide it from view by clicking to deselect the 2D option in the Show In area of the Toolpaths Home page. 20. Type the name that you want to give the toolpath in the Name box. If you do not give the toolpath a name, the Smart Engraving label is used by default. 21. You can now specify when you want to calculate the toolpath: If you want to calculate the toolpath now, click on the Now button. 222 Enhanced Smart Engraving Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

229 A progress bar is displayed in the status bar area during the toolpath calculation process: You can click on the Cancel button to cancel the toolpath calculation process at any time. If you want to calculate the toolpath either independently or as part of a batch of toolpaths at a later time, click on the Later button. 22. Click on the Close button to return to the Toolpaths Home page. The toolpath is listed on the Toolpaths Home page. If the toolpath name is shown in black, this indicates that the toolpath has already been calculated. If it is shown in red, this indicates that the toolpath has not yet been calculated. When calculated, a wireframe view of the toolpath is shown in the 3D View window by default. Providing that the Create 2D Preview option was selected at the time of calculating the toolpath, a toolpath preview is shown in the 2D View window by default. New Drill Bank Toolpath Drill Banks (Gang Drills) are a collection of drills, attached to the moving head of a router. They are primarily used by cabinetmakers to drill a large number of holes simultaneously. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New Drill Bank Toolpath 223

230 ArtCAM JewelSmith's Drill Bank toolpath allows you to drill at the centre of each vector in a selection of artwork, typically circular. You can configure any type of Drill Bank pattern such as L, + or T shapes containing any number of drills to match the Drill Bank on your machine. ArtCAM JewelSmith considers the selected geometry and applies a Drill Bank toolpath for all X and Y axis holes containing a 32 mm (1.26") pitch (standard pitch value for most machines). To create a drill bank toolpath: 1. Select the vector artwork in the 2D View window that represents the layout of the holes that you want to drill. In the example shown below, a 5 mm (0.197") circle was drawn. This is equivalent to the drill diameter. The circle was then block copied into 5 columns and rows with an X and Y offset of 32 mm (1.26"). This offset is equivalent to the standard European drill bank pitch. 2. Click on the Toolpaths tab to display the Toolpaths Home page. 3. Click on the Drill Banks button in the 2D Toolpaths area to display the Drill Banks page. 4. If you want to load a toolpath template: 224 New Drill Bank Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

231 First click on the Load... button in the Drill Banks Toolpath Template area to display the Load Toolpath Template dialog box: Next click on the Look in list box, then click to select the folder on your computer in which the toolpath template that you want to use is stored. When you have found the toolpath template file, click on the file name listed in the main window of the Load Toolpath Template dialog box. Now click on the Open button to close the dialog box and load the toolpaths within the template file into ArtCAM JewelSmith. The toolpaths are listed on the Toolpaths Home page. 5. Define the surface depth of the area in which you want to drill holes in the Start Depth box. 6. Define the bottom of the drill holes in the Finish Depth box. 7. Define the height above the material block at which you want your tool to make the transition from the rapid rate to the plunge rate in the Plunge Clearance box. To display the default plunge rate associated with the drill bank, click on the arrow icon in the Parameters area. You can change the plunge rate associated with the drill bank. 8. If you want to change the height at which the drill bank makes rapid moves between toolpath segments: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New Drill Bank Toolpath 225

232 First click on the arrow icon in the Machine Safe Z area to display the Safe Z box and the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes. Next define the height in the Safe Z box. 9. If you want to define the Home Position for the drill bank: First define its position along the X, Y and Z axes in the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes. Next click on the arrow icon in the Machine Safe Z area to hide the Safe Z box and the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes. 10. If you want to change the machining parameters for the drill bank, click on the arrow icon in the Parameters area to display the Feed Rate, Plunge Rate, Spindle and Tool Number boxes. Define the feed rate of the drill bank in the Feed Rate box. Define the plunge rate of the drill bank in the Plunge Rate box. Define the rotational speed of the spindle in the Spindle box. The spindle is the part of the drill bank that rotates during operation. On a mill it holds the tool in position. On a lathe it holds the block of material. Define the position of the drill bank within the CNC machine's tool changer in the Tool Number box. 11. If you want to adjust the diameter of any of the tools in the default drill bank layout: First click on the circle shown in the Drill Diagram (View Down Z) area representing the position of the tool in the drill bank. Its diameter appears in the Diameter box and its number appears in the Number box. 226 New Drill Bank Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

233 For example, when working in metric measurements and clicking on the black circle representing the drill tool second from left in the default drill diagram, 5 is shown in the Diameter box and a number 2 is shown in the Number box. You cannot edit the tool number associated with any tool in the drill bank unless the Advanced settings are displayed on the page. Next define the diameter of the selected tool in the Diameter box. Now click on the Update Drill button. The size of the circle is adjusted according to the diameter that you have defined. For example, if you are working in metric measurements and type 15 in the box the black circle representing the drill tool second from left in the default drill diagram is now shown as follows: 12. If you want to adjust the configuration of the drill bank shown in the Drill Diagram (View Down Z) area of the page: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New Drill Bank Toolpath 227

234 First click on the Advanced... button in the area to display a message box warning that only experts should modify the advanced settings and that configuration mistakes can cause machining errors: Click on the OK button to close the message box and display the advanced settings on the Drill Banks page. If you want to close the Advanced settings at any time, click on the Advanced... button again. In the Size area, define the number of drills in the bank along the X-axis in the W box and the number of drills along the Y- axis in the H box. In the Center area, define the X and Y co-ordinates of the zero drill in the X and Y boxes. In the Origin Drill area, define the X and Y co-ordinates of the origin drill in the X and Y boxes. The origin drill is shown in green in the Drill Diagram (View Down Z) area of the page. Define the distance between each drill in the bank in the Pitch box. The default distance of 32 mm (1.26") is the European Standard. Click on the Update Config button to update the advanced settings. The new drill bank configuration is shown in the Drill Diagram (View Down Z) area of the page. 13. Define the range within which you want to compensate for minor changes in circle diameter in the Circle Tolerance box. 14. Define the range within which you want to compensate for minor changes in pitch in the Pitch Tolerance box. 15. If you want to use peck drilling during the machining process: Click to select the Use Peck Drilling option to display its settings. Define the height (Z) to which the drill bank retracts each time that its associated Stepdown value is met in the Retraction Z box. 228 New Drill Bank Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

235 The drill bank continues to cut further into the material block either until it reaches the height defined in the Finish Depth box or its associated Stepdown value, in which case the drill bank retracts to the height defined in the Retraction Z box once again before re-entering the holes and cutting downwards until its Stepdown value is met yet again. This cycle continues until the defined Finish Depth is met. 16. If your material settings are undefined, click on the Setup... button in the Material area to display the Material Setup dialog box. If you have previously defined your material settings, the material thickness is shown in the Material area. Click on the arrow icon in the Material area to view the material Z zero position and the Z height of both the top and bottom of the block. 17. If you do not want to preview the toolpath in the 2D View window, click to deselect the Create 2D Preview option. It is recommended that you create a 2D preview. You can always hide it from view by clicking to deselect the 2D option in the Show In area of the Toolpaths Home page. 18. Type the name that you want to give the toolpath in the Name box. If you do not give the toolpath a name, the Drill Bank label is used by default. 19. You can now specify when you want to calculate the toolpath: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New Drill Bank Toolpath 229

236 If you want to calculate the toolpath now, click on the Now button. The preview circles that surround the column of circle vectors on the right identify the position of the origin drill in the drill bank. The position of the origin drill is displayed in green in the Drill Diagram (View Down Z) area. A message box is displayed confirming the total number of drill holes and plunge moves in both the X and Y axis needed to machine the drill holes using the current drill bank configuration. In our example, only five plunge moves are required in order to machine twenty-five drill holes: Click on the OK button to close the message box. If you want to calculate the toolpath either independently or as part of a batch of toolpaths at a later time, click on the Later button. 20. Click on the Close button to return to the Toolpaths Home page. 230 New Drill Bank Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

237 The toolpath preview illustrates all of the drill holes created by the drill bank: The toolpath preview is not shown in the 2D View window if the Create 2D Preview is deselected during the toolpath calculation. You can now simulate the toolpath. The resulting toolpath simulation traces the plunge moves of the origin drill, but also displays all of the drill holes resulting from the drill bank. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New Drill Bank Toolpath 231

238 Enhanced Drilling Toolpath When creating drill holes, you can now define the height above the material block at which you want your cutting tool to make the transition from the rapid rate to the plunge rate, which prevents the tool colliding with uneven material surfaces during rapid moves. The rate of the rapid move down can sometimes cause tool damage when machining particularly hard or uneven surfaces. To create drill holes: 1. Click on the Drilling button in the 2D Toolpaths area of the Toolpaths Home page to display the Drilling page. 2. If you are creating drill holes using vector artwork, make sure that all of the vectors that you want to use are selected. If you are creating drill holes using calculated toolpaths, make sure that the toolpath previews that you want to use are selected. 3. Define the depth (Z) from the material surface at which you want to create the drill holes in the Start Depth box. 4. Define the depth (Z) of the bottom of each drill hole in the Finish Depth box. If you select the Drill Toolpath Plunges option in the Drill Centre of... area, the Finish Depth box is not displayed. This is because the bottom of each drill hole is equal to the depth of the lowest machining pass in each selected toolpath preview, including any additional positive offset defined in the Offset Z box. 232 Enhanced Drilling Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

239 5. Define the height above the material block at which you want your tool to make the transition from the rapid rate to the plunge rate in the Plunge Clearance box. To display the default plunge rate associated with a tool chosen from the Tool Database, click on the arrow icon in the Tool area. You can change the plunge rate associated with the selected tool. 6. If you want to change the height at which the tool makes rapid moves between toolpath segments: First click on the arrow icon in the Machine Safe Z area to display the Safe Z box and the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes. Next define the height in the Safe Z box. If you want to define the Home Position for the tool: First define its position along the X, Y and Z axes in the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes. Next click on the arrow icon to hide the Safe Z box and the Home Position's X, Y and Z boxes. 7. Click on the Select... button in the Tool area to open the Tool Database: 8. Double-click on the tool that you want to use. ArtCAM JewelSmith closes the Tool Database and displays the selected tool's description in the Tool area. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Drilling Toolpath 233

240 If you want to amend the machining parameters associated with the selected tool, click on the arrow icon in the Tool area. When you have finished, click on the arrow icon to hide the machining parameters. 9. To control where the drill holes are cut in the material block, select one of the Drill Centre of... options by clicking on its radio button: If you want to create a drill hole in the centre of every selected circular vector, click to select the Selected Circular Vectors option then define the tolerance used to decide which of the selected vectors are considered as circular or not in the Tol. box If you have selected any shape of vector other than a circle or if a circular vector is not within tolerance, then this is ignored. If you want to create a drill hole in the centre of every selected vector irrespective of its shape, click to select the All Selected Vectors option. Each drill hole is created in the position equal to the centre of the bounding box that would surround the vector when selected. If you want to create a drill hole at each point (node) within every selected vector, click to select the All Selected Vector Nodes option. If you want to create a drill hole at the position where each plunge move is made in a toolpath, click to select the Drill Toolpath Plunges option then define any additional positive offset that you want to apply in the Offset Z box displayed below. You can only create drill holes using calculated 2D toolpaths where a toolpath preview has been created in the 2D View window. Plunge moves are shown in the 3D View window in cyan, providing that the Toolpaths > Toolpath Drawing > Show Rapid and Plunge Moves option is selected on the Main Menu bar. 10. If you want to use peck drilling during the machining process: Click to select the Use Peck Drilling option to display its settings. 234 Enhanced Drilling Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

241 Define the height (Z) to which the tool is retracted each time that its associated Stepdown value is met in the Retraction Z box. The tool continues to cut further into the material block either until it reaches the height defined in the Finish Depth box or its associated Stepdown value, in which case the tool retracts to the height defined in the Retraction Z box once again before re-entering the hole and cutting downwards until its Stepdown value is met yet again. This cycle continues until the defined Finish Depth is met. When the Drill Toolpath Plunges option is selected in the Drill Centre of... area, the peck drilling cycle continues until the tool reaches the lowest machining pass in each selected toolpath preview, including any additional positive offset defined in the Offset Z box. 11. Use the options in the Sequencing area to set the order in which each segment in the drilling toolpath is machined. You can either allow ArtCAM JewelSmith to calculate the machining order or use a polyline drawn in the 2D View window to plot the machining order. If you want ArtCAM JewelSmith to calculate the order in which each toolpath segment is machined: First select the Auto option by clicking on its radio button. Now click on the list box followed by the option that you want to use for the machining order: Select the Optimise option to instruct ArtCAM JewelSmith to find the most efficient machining order. Select the Use Text Order option to machine according to the order in which a selection of vector text was created. Select the Left to Right option to machine from the left of the model area to the right. Select the Right to Left option to machine from the right of the model area to the left. Select the Bottom To Top option to machine from the bottom of the model area to the top. Select the Top To Bottom option to machine from the top of the model area to the bottom. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Drilling Toolpath 235

242 Select the Spiral Out option to machine from the centre of the model area outwards in a spiral motion. This is particularly useful when using clamps to secure a material sheet or block to your router. Select the Spiral In option to machine from the outside edge of the model area inwards in a spiral motion. If you want to control the order in which each toolpath segment is machined: First select the Manual option by clicking on its radio button. Next draw a polyline in the 2D View window plotting the order in which you want the toolpath segments to be machined. Its Start Point should be positioned close to the toolpath segment from which you want to begin machining. Now click to select the polyline that you have drawn, and then click on the Select Vector button. The No vector selected message originally shown in red now reads as Vector Selected in blue, the Cancel Selection button replaces the Select Vector button and direction arrows are drawn along the selected vector. If you do not select an open ungrouped vector, a message box is displayed warning that only a single ungrouped vector can be used: Click on the OK button to close the message box, and then repeat this step this time selecting an appropriate vector. If you want to change the selected vector, click on the Cancel Selection button and repeat this step. Finally make sure that the all of the vector artwork that you want to use when creating drill holes is selected. 12. If your material settings are undefined, click on the Setup... button in the Material area to display the Material Setup dialog box. 236 Enhanced Drilling Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

243 If you have previously defined your material settings, the material thickness is shown in the Material area. Click on the arrow icon in the Material area to view the material Z zero position and the Z height of both the top and bottom of the block. 13. If you do not want to preview the toolpath in the 2D View window, click to deselect the Create 2D Preview option. It is recommended that you create a 2D preview. You can always hide it from view by clicking to deselect the 2D option in the Show In area of the Toolpaths Home page. 14. Type the name that you want to give the toolpath in the Name box. If you do not give the toolpath a name, the Drilling label is used by default. 15. You can now specify when you want to calculate the toolpath: If you want to calculate the toolpath now, click on the Now button. A progress bar is displayed in the status bar area during the calculation process: You can click on the Cancel button to end the calculation process at any time. If you want to calculate the toolpath either independently or as part of a batch of toolpaths at a later time, click on the Later button. 16. Click on the Close button to return to the Toolpaths Home page. The toolpath is listed on the Toolpaths Home page. If the toolpath name is shown in black, this indicates that the toolpath has already been calculated. If it is shown in red, this indicates that the toolpath has not yet been calculated. When calculated, a wireframe view of the toolpath is shown in the 3D View window by default. Providing that the Create 2D Preview option was selected at the time of calculating the toolpath, a toolpath preview is shown in the 2D View window by default. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Drilling Toolpath 237

244 Enhanced Profiling Toolpath When creating a Profiling toolpath including lead moves you can now produce a single ramp of continuous motion from the top of the material to the full depth of cut. This prevents the tip of the tool from going straight down into the material surface. The surface depth is equal to the Start Depth. To ramp all linear lead moves from the surface of the material block: 1. Click to select the Add Lead In / Out Moves option to display its associated settings on the page. 2. Make sure that the Ramp from surface option is selected. The value in the Lead Distance must be greater than zero when using the Ramp from surface option. 238 Enhanced Profiling Toolpath What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

245 New 2D Machining Wizard Tool The new 2D Machining Wizard provides a fully automated nestedbased manufacturing solution for makers of custom furniture and cabinetry. Using layered Drawing Interchange Format (*.dxf) files originating from a variety of CAD systems, including the popular KCDw Cabinetmakers software, the 2D Machining Wizard nests vector artwork representing each of the cabinet components across multiple sheets, grouping them according to material and thickness. The 2D Machining Wizard then generates optimized toolpaths using pre-defined templates, assigning any combination of machining strategy, cutting tool and machining parameters to each of the Drawing Interchange Format (*.dxf) layers that make up the design. The calculated toolpaths can be simulated, if required, before being sent to the machine. More than 180 machine tool control options are supported, including those that offer automatic tool changing. You can generate sheet reports for your nested design and outputs panel label data compatible with several third-party labelling packages, thus streamlining the entire process for the machine operator. To use the 2D Machining Wizard: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New 2D Machining Wizard Tool 239

246 1. Click on the Create New Model icon in the Models area of the Assistant's Home page to display the Size For New Model dialog box: 2. Create a new model with its dimensions equivalent to those of the sheets of material you are using. For details, see Creating a New Model. For example, we will create a model with dimensions equivalent to a 98 x 48 inch (2440 x 1220 mm) sheet of material. These imperial and metric measurements are equivalent to the standard dimensions of a sheet of material. 3. Click on the OK button to close the Size For New Model dialog box and create the ArtCAM model. A 2D View window fills the previously empty design window area. The white model area shown in the window represents the sheet of material when viewed down the Z-axis. 240 New 2D Machining Wizard Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

247 4. Click on the Toolpaths > Material Setup... option from the Main Menu bar to display the Material Setup dialog box: 5. Define the Material Thickness equal to that of the sheets of material you are using and make sure that the Material Z Zero is set to the top of the block. We will set the Material Thickness to 0.75 inches (20 mm) and the Material Z Zero to Top Of Block. We will also set the Top Offset in the Model Position In Material area to Click on the Toolpaths tab to display the Toolpaths Home page. 7. Click on the 2D Machining Wizard button in the 2D Toolpaths area of the Toolpaths Home page to display the 2D Machining Wizard settings page on the Assistant tab. Click on the Show Help option at the top of the settings page to toggle the display of the in-line help associated with the 2D Machining Wizard. You can click on the Hide Help option to conceal the in-line help. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New 2D Machining Wizard Tool 241

248 8. Click on the Browse... button in the Choose Project CSV File area to display the Select Project File dialog box: 9. Use either of the following methods to find the text file from which you want to create a job: By default, ArtCAM JewelSmith lists Text Documents only (*.txt). You can list Comma Separated Variable (*.csv) files instead by clicking on the Files of type list box followed by the Project Files (*.csv) option. You can use Look in list box and the Up One Level button to navigate to the folder containing the file from which you want to create the job. 10. Once you have located the text file from which you want to create the job, click on its file name to select it. This text file must be located in the same folder as the Drawing Interchange Format (*.dxf) files to which it refers. Its name is displayed in the File name area of the dialog box. Navigate to the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\ArtCAM Files\ArtCamFrame folder on your computer, and then click to select the file named ArtCamFrame_CNCList.txt. If you are using Windows Vista, navigate to the C:\Users\Public\Documents\ArtCAM Files\ArtCamFrame folder on your computer. 242 New 2D Machining Wizard Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

249 If we open this particular text file in a text-editing tool, we can see that each line of text comprises values associated with the following fields: DXF Filename, Part Description, Width, Length, Thickness, Material Type, Cabinet ID Number, Quantity, Origin in X-axis, Origin in Y-axis, Orientation 11. Click on the Open button to import the selected text file into the Choose Project CSV File... area of the 2D Machining Wizard settings page and close the Select Project File dialog box. ArtCAM JewelSmith identifies the total number of panels, different types of material and different types of parts within the selected text file and displays these details in the Message Area window. If ArtCAM JewelSmith cannot find any of the Drawing Interchange Format (*.dxf) files referenced within the selected text file, an error message is displayed in the Message Area window warning that the file(s) cannot be recognised. Typically an error is displayed if the text file and its associated Drawing Interchange Format (*.dxf) file are not stored in the same folder on your computer or if there is a discrepancy between the spelling of the name of the actual Drawing Interchange Format (*.dxf) file and how it is referenced within the selected text file. 12. Click on the View Log button to display a text file in a new Internet Explorer window containing all data currently recorded in the Message Area window. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New 2D Machining Wizard Tool 243

250 13. Click on the Browse... button in the Choose Toolpath Template area to display the Choose Toolpath Template dialog box: 14. Use the Look in list box and the Up One Level button to navigate to the folder containing the Toolpath Template (*.tpl) file that you want to use. 15. Once you have located the Toolpath Template (*.tpl) file that you want to use, click on its file name to select it. Its name is displayed in the File name box. 16. Click on the Open button to import the selected toolpath template file into the Choose Toolpath Template area of the 2D Machining Wizard settings page and close the Choose Toolpath Template dialog box. 17. Select the option that reflects the layout of the panel referenced in the selection Drawing Interchange Format (*.dxf) file by clicking on its associated radio button: If the length of the part is aligned with the X-axis, make sure that the Length in X option. If the length of the part is aligned with the Y-axis, make sure that the Length in Y option. 18. Define the offset distance applied to the nested panel artwork in the Nesting Clearance box. This should at least be equal to the diameter of the Profiling tool referenced in the Toolpath Template (*.tpl) file used when machining the nested panel artwork. 244 New 2D Machining Wizard Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

251 19. Define the offset distance at which the nested panel artwork is set from the edge of the material sheet in the Edge Clearance box. 20. Click on the Machine Type... list box, followed by the postprocessor that is compatible with your machining tool. 21. If you are using a drilling bit separate from the router-head, click to select the Use optional Drilling type option and then click on the list box below followed by the appropriate post-processor. 22. Click on the Browse... button in the Select GCode Folder area to display the Browse for Folder dialog box: 23. If you want to make a new folder on your computer in which to store the toolpath output files resulting from the 2D Machining Wizard, click to select the drive or folder beneath which you want to create the new folder and then click on the Make New Folder button. 24. Click on the OK button to close the dialog box. The path of the chosen GCode folder is displayed on the settings page. For example. C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\ArtCAM Files\Toolpaths\GCode\. 25. Click on the Check Files button to search the selected text file (*.txt or *.csv) for the Drawing Interchange Format (*.dxf) files referenced within it. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New 2D Machining Wizard Tool 245

252 26. Click on the Calculate button to begin the 2D Machining Wizard calculation process. A message reading "Nesting panels for..." is displayed in the Message Area of the page. The 2D Machining Wizard begins by calculating the required number of sheets for each of the different types of material previously identified from the text file. We have already established that five different types of material are required for this particular job, so at this stage we know that at least five sheets of material are needed. The resulting sheets adopt the name of the material found in the text file. The vector data contained in the Drawing Interchange Format (*.dxf) files referenced within the text file is then nested across these sheets. The data within the text file determines what vector artwork is intended for which sheet. For example, the artwork within the ArtCamFrame_03_Drawer_Box_Side_001F file is bound for a sheet named 1/2 Birch. The nesting clearance previously defined is applied during the nesting calculation process. Where accumulated vector data found between the Drawing Interchange Format (*.dxf) files cannot be nested on a single sheet, subsequent sheets are created as necessary and are numbered sequentially. For example, two sheets of 3/4 Ply are needed to host all of the vector artwork embedded within thirteen of the Drawing Interchange Format (*.dxf) files, and these are named 3/4 Ply_Sheet1 and 3/4 Ply_Sheet2 respectively. The 2D Machining Wizard then creates new vector layers in the model according to the layer information within the Drawing Interchange Format (*.dxf) files. The nested vector artwork remains on the same layer as that which was originally created as part of the Drawing Interchange Format (*.dxf) file. Once all of the vector data has been assigned to appropriate sheets and layers, the 2D Machining Wizard loads the toolpath template and begins the toolpath calculation process. A message reading "Creating toolpaths for each sheet..." is then displayed in the Message Area. 246 New 2D Machining Wizard Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

253 The 2D Machining Wizard reads the name of a vector layer and then searches for exactly the same text in all of the toolpath names that originate from the toolpath template. The information is stored within brackets as part of the toolpath name. For example, the vector layer named Panel_0P2500 is clearly referenced in the toolpath named 1/4 Ply_Sheet1_Profile (Panel_0P2500). Where the name of a vector layer matches the text within the brackets in the toolpath name, the 2D Machining Wizard applies the toolpath settings in the template to the artwork on that layer. This process is repeated until toolpath settings have been applied to all of the vector artwork drawn across the layers. A message reading "Calculating toolpaths..." is then displayed in the Message Area. The 2D Machining Wizard calculates all of the toolpaths in sequence as part of a single batch: Calculated toolpaths are listed in the Toolpaths Available For Calculation window in black, while uncalculated toolpaths are listed in red. All of the messages displayed in the Status area of the Batch Calculate Toolpaths dialog box are repeated in the Message Area of the 2D Machining Wizard settings page. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New 2D Machining Wizard Tool 247

254 A message reading "Writing GCode..." is then displayed in the Message Area. The 2D Machining Wizard outputs the toolpath files according to your chosen post-processors to the selected toolpath output folder. A message reading "Finished" is displayed in the Message Area. The nested panel vector artwork is shown in the 2D View window along with a preview of all of the toolpaths needed to machine this. The 1/4 Birch_Sheet1 sheet is selected in the list box in the Vectors area of the Layers Manager. 27. Click on the View Log button to display a text file in a new Internet Explorer window containing a record of data from every stage of the calculation process. This file is stored in the same folder chosen for your toolpath output. 248 New 2D Machining Wizard Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

255 There are seven new vector layers in the stack shown in the Vectors area of the Layers Manager. There are eight in total if we include the Default Layer. The names of these new vector layers provide a clear indication of their use: Panel describes a vector layer containing artwork used to create a toolpath for machining the perimeter of panels. RoutDrawer describes a vector layer containing artwork used to create a toolpath for machining a dado in a drawer-bottom panel. DrillShelf describes a vector layer containing artwork used to create a toolpath for drilling shelf holes in a panel. RoutBack describes a vector layer containing artwork used to create a toolpath for routing a back panel. Rout describes a vector layer containing artwork used to create a toolpath for routing a top or bottom panel. There are two different colours assigned amongst the seven vector layers. The vector artwork found within the Drawing Interchange Format (*.dxf) files is nested across six sheets. Each sheet represents an actual sheet of material required for the job and adopts the name of the different types of materials identified in the text file during the calculation process. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New 2D Machining Wizard Tool 249

256 The 1/4 Birch_Sheet1 sheet is currently selected in the list box shown in the Vectors area of the Layers Manager. You can control which sheet of nested vector artwork is shown in the 2D View window by clicking on this list box, followed by the name of the specific sheet that you want to view. Only one sheet can be viewed at any time, although it is possible to preview the contents of all sheets. You can only edit the vector artwork drawn on the sheet that is currently selected. It may help to visualize the active sheet as the CNC table bed and the remaining greyed-out sheets as the material within your workshop. 28. Click on the list box shown in the Vectors area of the Layers Manager, followed by the 3/4 Finish Ply_Sheet1 option to select it as the active sheet. 29. Click on the Window Fit button in the 2D View toolbar to adjust the view so that only the vector artwork associated with the 3/4 Finish Ply_Sheet1 sheet can be seen in the 2D View window. The vector artwork associated with the sheet, together with previews of its associated toolpaths, are shown as follows: 30. Click on the Project tab to display the Project Tree. 31. Click on the expand icon beside the Toolpaths item in the Project Tree to list all of the calculated toolpaths in the Project Tree. 250 New 2D Machining Wizard Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

257 32. Right-click on the Toolpaths item to display its context-menu and then click on the Simulate All Toolpaths menu option to simulate all of the toolpaths listed in the Project Tree. The Toolpath Simulation - Block Definition dialog box is displayed: 33. Click on the Simulate Toolpath button to close the dialog box and simulate the toolpaths. The simulated toolpaths are shown in the 3D View window as follows: The toolpaths associated with the 3/4 Finish Ply_Sheet1 vector layer are 3/4 Finish Ply_Sheet1_Profile (Panel 0P7500), 3/4 Finish Ply_Sheet1_Area Clear (Rout), 3/4 Finish Ply_Sheet1_Area Clear (RoutBack) and 3/4 Finish Ply_Sheet1_Drilling (DrillShelf). What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New 2D Machining Wizard Tool 251

258 34. Press the F2 key on your keyboard to display the 2D View window. 35. Click on the Vectors > Sheets > Sheet Report - Active option from the Main Menu bar to display a sheet report for the 3/4 Finish Ply_Sheet1 sheet in a new window: This report contains a preview of the vector artwork associated with the sheet, data concerning the sheet dimensions and toolpath data associated with the sheet. The report can be saved or sent to any printer installed on your computer. 36. Right-click on the Toolpaths item to display its context-menu and then click on the Reset Simulation menu option to delete the simulated toolpaths shown in the 3D View window. 37. Repeat these steps for each of the sheets in the model. 38. Using Windows Explorer, navigate to whichever folder you defined in the Select GCode Folder area of the 2D Machining Wizard as the location for the toolpath output files. 39. Double-click your mouse on this folder to view its contents. 252 New 2D Machining Wizard Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

259 40. Right-click on the labels.csv file to display its context-menu, move the mouse cursor over the Open With... menu option to display its associated menu and then click on the Notepad option to view the contents of the file: If you do not have Notepad installed, you can use WordPad, Microsoft Excel or any other suitable text-editing tool currently installed on your computer to open the file. We can see that each line of text within the file comprises of values associated with the following fields: Material_ArtCAM Sheet, Part Description, Cabinet ID Number What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New 2D Machining Wizard Tool 253

260 This file can be used to print labels for each of the components in your job. For example, when opening the labels.csv file using the Avery Wizard for Microsoft Word 2003 along with its L4737 Removable Labels template, the data within the file is formatted as follows: New MillWizard Machining Tool MillWizard is a simple machining wizard that allows you to calculate roughing and finishing raster toolpath strategies to machine a broad range of compatible triangle and surface models. You can also simulate and save the resulting toolpaths. 254 New MillWizard Machining Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

261 1. Click on the MillWizard icon in the Other Features area of the Assistant's Getting Started page. The MillWizard tab is displayed in the panel on the left of the ArtCAM JewelSmith interface with its first page of settings shown. The menu options on the Main Menu bar are limited when using MillWizard. 2. Click on the Working Units list box, followed by the option for the units of measurement in which you are working (imperial or metric). 3. Click on the Browse... button to display the Import 3D Model dialog box: 4. Click on the Look in list box and select the folder on your computer in which the 3D model that you want to import is stored. Triangle model files are listed in the window by default. If you are importing a triangle model, you can use 3D Assembly (*.3da), ArtCAM Project (*.3dp), 3D Studio (*.3ds), Drawing Interchange (*.dxf), Binary or ASCII STL (*.stl), Universal 3D (*.u3d), Wavefront Object (*.obj) and Delcam Machining Triangles (*.dmt) files. 5. If you want to import a surface model, click on the Files of type list box followed by the Surface Models (*.3dm, *.dgk) option. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New MillWizard Machining Tool 255

262 If you are importing a surface model, you can use 3D NURBS Modeller - Rhinoceros (*.3dm) or Delcam DGK (*.dgk) files. 6. Click on the name of the 3D model that you want to import. Its name is displayed in the File name box. 7. Click on the Open button to close the dialog box and import your chosen 3D model. The 3D model is displayed in the 3D View window and its dimensions are shown on the MillWizard tab. For details on how to manipulate the 3D model shown in the 3D View window, see Enhanced 3D View Window. For example, an imported 3D Studio (*.3ds) model of Nefertiti's head and neck is displayed as follows: 8. If you are working using metric measurements and the imported model was originally created using imperial units, make sure that the Model was in inches option is selected. If you are working using imperial measurements and the imported model was originally created using metric units, make sure that the Model was in mm option is selected. 9. Click on the Next > button to display the second page of settings on the MillWizard tab. 256 New MillWizard Machining Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

263 If you want to return to the Assistant's Getting Started page, click on the Exit button. If you want to change the 3D model, click on the < Prev button to return to the first page of settings and repeat the previous steps. If you click on the Next > button before selecting a 3D model, a message box is displayed warning you that a model must be selected first: Click on the OK button to close the message box. 10. Select the cut direction option that you want to use by clicking on its associated radio button. The 3D model shown in the 3D View window is repositioned relative to the cut plane immediately after you click on a radio button. In our example, the cut direction is set to Front as shown below: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New MillWizard Machining Tool 257

264 11. If you want to rotate the 3D model by 90 degrees in a clockwise direction, make sure that the Rotate model by 90 option is selected. 12. Click on the Next > button to display the third page of settings on the MillWizard tab. The dimensions of the model are displayed in the X, Y and Z boxes. 13. If you want to scale the model proportionally, define the new measurement in either the X, Y or Z box, or as a percentage of its original size in the % box. If you want to revert to the original size of the model, type 100 in the % box. 14. Click on the Next > button to display the fourth page of settings on the MillWizard tab. The model dimensions are displayed along with the current position of the cut plane in the Z direction. 15. Define the height in Z at which you want to position the cut plane relative to the model in the CP box. The area of the model below the cut plane is disregarded during the toolpath calculation process. You can use positive and negative values when defining the position of the cut plane in the Z direction. Use a positive value to move the cut plane upwards and a negative value to move it downwards. 16. Click on the Apply button to set the new position of the cut plane. 17. If you want to align the cut plane with the centre of the model, click on the Centre in Model button. 18. If you want to align the cut plane with the bottom of the model, click on the Bottom of Model button. 19. Click on the Next > button to display the fifth page of settings in the MillWizard tab. You can now click on the Toggle Assembly Visibility button in the 3D View toolbar to toggle the display of the imported 3D model in the 3D View window. 258 New MillWizard Machining Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

265 20. Click on the Select... button in the Roughing Tool area to display the Tool Database dialog box: 21. Double-click on the tool that you want to use. ArtCAM JewelSmith closes the Tool Database and displays the selected tool's description in the Roughing Tool area. If you want to amend any of the machining parameters associated with the selected tool, click on the arrow icon beside the tool's description in the Roughing Tool area. When you have finished, click on the arrow icon to hide the machining parameters. 22. If you want to use a finishing tool, click on the Select... button in the Finishing Tool area to display the Tool Database dialog box. If you want to amend any of the machining parameters associated with the selected tool, click on the arrow icon beside the tool's description in the Roughing Tool area. When you have finished, click on the arrow icon to hide the machining parameters. 23. If you want to add or remove extra material around the model, define the distance between the material surface and the Roughing Tool in the Roughing box. 24. If you want to add or remove extra material around the model, define the distance between the material surface and the Finishing Tool in the Finishing box. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New MillWizard Machining Tool 259

266 25. If you want to add a symmetrical border around the model, define the width of the border in the Add Border box. MillWizard recalls which tools you have selected, and calculates a border approximately equal to the sum of the radius of the larger tool and any allowance defined. 26. Click on the Next > button to display the sixth page of settings in the MillWizard tab. The model is adjusted according to the settings you have previously defined. The area of the original model below the cut plane is deleted, the cut plane is aligned with the zero plane and a wireframe of the material block is shown in the 3D View window. If you click on the Next > button without selecting either a Roughing or Finishing tool, a message box is displayed warning that a tool must be selected: Click on the OK button to close the message box and then select a Roughing and/or Finishing tool. If the allowance applied to the Roughing tool is less than that applied to the Finishing tool, a message box is displayed warning that it must be equal to or greater than the allowance applied to the Finishing tool: Click on the OK button to close the message box, and then define a suitable allowance. 260 New MillWizard Machining Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

267 If the allowance applied to the Roughing and Finishing tools is equal or within 1 mm ( inches) of each other, a message box is displayed warning that unwanted cusps of material may remain on the finished piece: If you want to ignore this warning, click on the Yes button to close the message box. If you want to avoid unwanted cusps of material, click on the No button to close the message box, adjust the value in the Roughing and/or Finishing box and then click on the Next > button again. In our example, the model is displayed as follows: 27. If you want to align the cutting direction of the Finishing toolpath with that used in the Roughing toolpath, make sure that the Aligned With Roughing option is selected. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New MillWizard Machining Tool 261

268 28. Click on the Setup... button in the Material area to display the Material Setup dialog box: The thickness of the model is displayed in the Material Setup dialog box and on MillWizard's Strategy page. You can display the Z heights of the material block and the position of the origin by clicking on the arrow icon below the Setup... button. 29. Make sure that the value in the Material Thickness box is greater than the value displayed in the Model Thickness area. If you define a material thickness less than than the model thickness, the OK button is greyed-out. 30. Set the Z zero position in the block of material by clicking on either of the radio buttons in the Material Z Zero area. 31. Set the position of the model relative to the block of material using any of the following methods: Clicking and drag on the slider in the Model Position In Material area. Drag upwards to reduce the offset from the top of the block and increase the offset from the bottom of the block. Drag downwards to increase the offset from the top of the block and reduce the offset from the bottom of the block. 262 New MillWizard Machining Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

269 Defining the offset from the top of the block in the Top Offset box. The value in the Bottom Offset box is adjusted simultaneously. If you define a bottom offset greater than the current top offset, the OK button is greyed-out. Defining the offset from the bottom of the block in the Bottom Offset box. The value in the Top Offset box is adjusted simultaneously. If you define a top offset greater than the current bottom offset, the OK button is greyed-out. 32. Click on the OK button to define the material settings and close the dialog box. 33. Define the height at which the Roughing and Finishing tools make rapid moves between toolpath segments in the Safe Z Height box. 34. Click on the Next > button to display the seventh page of settings in the MillWizard tab. You are now ready to calculate the toolpaths: If you have not yet defined the material settings, a message box is displayed warning that the material thickness must be defined: Click on the OK button to close the message box, and then define your material settings. If you do not want to calculate the Roughing toolpath now, make sure that the Roughing option in the Calculate Toolpaths area is deselected. If you have not selected a Roughing tool on the fifth page of settings, this option is greyed-out. If you do not want to calculate the Finishing toolpath now, make sure that the Finishing option in the Calculate Toolpaths area is deselected. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New MillWizard Machining Tool 263

270 If you have not selected a Finishing tool on the fifth page of settings, this option is greyed-out. 35. You are now ready to simulate the toolpaths: If you do not want to simulate the Roughing toolpath after it has been calculated, make sure that the Roughing option in the Simulate Toolpaths area is deselected. If you have not yet calculated the Roughing toolpath, this option is greyed-out. If you do not want to simulate the Finishing toolpath after it has been calculated, make sure that the Finishing option in the Simulate Toolpaths area is deselected. If you have not yet calculated the Finishing toolpath, this option is greyed-out. If you want to reset the toolpath simulation, click on the Reset button. In our example, the toolpath simulation is displayed as shown below: 264 New MillWizard Machining Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

271 36. If you want to toggle the display of the toolpath simulation in the 3D View window, click on the Show Simulation option. This is selected by default; meaning that the toolpath simulation is visible. When deselected, the wireframe of the calculated toolpaths is displayed in the 3D View window in its place. 37. Click on the Next > button to display the final page of settings in the MillWizard tab. 38. If you want to save the Roughing toolpath, click on the Save Roughing... button to display the Save Toolpaths dialog box. If you have not calculated a Roughing toolpath, the Save Roughing... button is greyed-out. The Roughing tool is listed in the Toolpaths to save to a single file window. If you have also calculated a Finishing toolpath, its associated tool is listed in the Calculated Toolpaths window. 39. If you want to save the Finishing toolpath, click on the Save Finishing... button to display the Save Toolpaths dialog box. If you have not calculated a Finishing toolpath, the Save Finishing... button is greyed-out. The Finishing tool is listed in the Toolpaths to save to a single file window. If you have also calculated a Roughing toolpath, its associated tool is listed in the Calculated Toolpaths window. When you have saved the first toolpath, click on the button to send the toolpath from the Toolpaths to save to a single file window to the Calculated Toolpaths window. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 New MillWizard Machining Tool 265

272 Click to select the name of the remaining toolpath that you have not yet saved, then click on the button to send it to the Toolpaths to save to a single file window. 40. Click on the Machine output file is formatted for list box, followed by the machine format that you require. 41. If you want to save the machine-specific toolpath file to a specific spool directory on your computer, make sure that the Save files to spool directory option is selected. If you have not already selected a spool directory, click on the Spool Dir... button to display the Browse For Folder dialog box. Create or select the folder on your computer where you want to save your machine-specific toolpath files, and then click on the OK button to confirm it as the spool directory. 42. Click on the Save... button to display the Save As dialog box. You can see that the machine format that you chose from the Machine output file is formatted for list box in the Save Toolpaths dialog box is shown in the Save as type list box. 43. Click on the Save in list box or use the Up One Level button to navigate to the folder on your computer in which you want to save the machine-specific toolpath file. 266 New MillWizard Machining Tool What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

273 If the Save files to spool directory option is selected in the Save Toolpaths dialog box, its location is shown in the Save in list box. 44. Type the name that you want to give to the machine-specific toolpath file in the File name box. 45. Click on the Save button to save the toolpaths listed in the Toolpaths to save to a single file window as a machinespecific toolpath file and close the Save As dialog box. 46. Click on the Close button to close the Save Toolpaths dialog box. If you want to close the Save As dialog box without saving the machine-specific toolpath file, click on the Cancel button. 47. Click on the Finish button in MillWizard to return to the Assistant's Home page. Enhanced Toolpath Batch Calculation The following enhancements have been made to the Batch Calculate Toolpaths dialog box: The Optimize Feed Rates option, which recalculates the feed rate to give a constant rate of material removal. Calculated toolpaths are listed in the Toolpaths Available For Calculation window in black, while all uncalculated toolpaths are listed in red. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Toolpath Batch Calculation 267

274 When the Calculate Toolpaths option is selected, all uncalculated toolpaths are selected by default. When the Optimize Feed Rates option is selected, all calculated toolpaths are selected by default. The Optimize Feed Rates option allows machining times to be reduced by up to 50% and so will give increased productivity and faster delivery in a wide range of manufacturing operations. Other benefits include reduced wear on cutting tools and CNC machines, improved surface finish, and less need for the operator to supervise machining. The Optimize Feed Rates option analyses the toolpaths created in ArtCAM JewelSmith and adjusts the feed rate to give a constant rate of material removal. With conventional machining, the feed rate has to be set at a constant speed determined by the most demanding aspect of the toolpath. Using the Optimize Feed Rates option permits a higher feed rate to be set for lighter cuts and air moves so enabling faster machining particularly when using high speed machining. Setting a constant rate for material removal means that there is a more consistent load placed on the cutting tool. This reduces wear on the tool and also the machining spindle. The cutter is also further protected by a reduction in the feed rate as it enters or leaves the material. Protecting the cutter in this way reduces the tooling costs, as well as saving the time needed to fit replacements. Similarly, protecting the machine tool reduces maintenance costs and and limits down time. A consistent load on the cutting tool also produces a better surface finish. This reduces the time and cost of hand-finishing. Quality can also be improved by minimising the opportunities for human error that are inevitable with hand-finishing. Finally, having the feed rate adjusted reduces the need for supervision of the machine tool and for manual adjustment of the feed rate. This leaves the operator more time for tasks. For example, it can help in the introduction of shop-floor programming. To optimise the feed rate in a selection of calculated toolpaths: 1. Use the and buttons on the Toolpaths Home page to reset the order in which the created and calculated toolpaths are listed so that they reflect how you want to machine the job. 268 Enhanced Toolpath Batch Calculation What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

275 2. Click on the Batch Calculate Toolpaths button in the Toolpath Operations area of the Toolpaths Home page to display the Batch Calculate Toolpaths dialog box: You can also click on the Toolpaths > Batch Calculate Toolpaths... menu option from the Main Menu bar to display the Batch Calculate Toolpaths dialog box. You can also display the Batch Calculate Toolpaths dialog box from the Project Tree. Right-click on the Toolpaths item to display its context-menu, then click on the Batch Calculate Toolpaths... menu option. 3. Select the Optimize Feed Rates option by clicking on its radio button. 4. Make sure that all of the toolpaths that you want to optimize are selected in the Toolpaths Available For Calculation window. All of the calculated toolpaths listed in the Toolpaths Available For Calculation window are selected by default. If you do not want to optimize a particular toolpath, click to deselect the check box beside its name. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Toolpath Batch Calculation 269

276 You can only optimize the feed rate in calculated toolpaths. The names of all calculated toolpaths are listed in the Toolpaths Available For Calculation window in black, while all uncalculated toolpaths are listed in red. If you want to optimize a particular toolpath with its name shown in red, it must be calculated first. You can deselect all of the toolpaths listed in the Toolpaths Available For Calculation window using the Select None button, and select them all using the Select All button. You cannot optimize the feed rate in a calculated Drill Bank toolpath. If any Drill Bank toolpaths are included in a selection chosen for optimization, a message is displayed in the Status area confirming that these toolpaths are ignored. 5. If you want to adjust the optimization settings, click on the Settings... button to display the Optifeed Parameters dialog box: 270 Enhanced Toolpath Batch Calculation What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

277 Define the distance of the lead-in move as a percentage of the tool diameter in the Lead in distance box. Define the percentage by which the feed rate is reduced until the tool is fully engaged with the material block in the Lead in factor box. The Lead in distance and Lead in factor are related in that they control any deceleration of the tool as it enters the block of material. When the tool enters the material, the feed rate is reduced until it is fully engaged. The amount by which it is slowed is decided by the Lead in factor. If the Lead in factor is 100%, the tool is not slowed down. The Lead in distance increases the distance over which the Lead in factor is applied. Define the distance of the lead-out move as a percentage of the tool diameter in the Lead out distance box. Define the percentage by which the feed rate is reduced until the tool is no longer engaged with the material block in the Lead out factor box. The Lead out distance and Lead out factor are related in that they control any deceleration of the tool as it leaves the block of material. When the tool leaves the material, the feed rate is reduced until it is no longer engaged. The amount by which it is slowed is decided by the Lead out factor. If the Lead out factor is 100%, the tool is not slowed down. The Lead out distance increases the distance over which the Lead out factor is applied. The Lead out distance is only applied to the end of the lead out region and is defined as a percentage of the tool diameter. Define the minimum difference that must exist between the original and recalculated feed rates before the feed rate is adjusted in the Minimum feed rate change box. This is set to 25% by default. Define the maximum limit to which the feed rate can be accelerated as a percentage of its original speed in the Maximum feed rate box. This is set to 300% by default. Define the minimum limit to which the feed rate can be decelerated as a percentage of its original speed in the Minimum feed rate box. This is set to 30% by default. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Toolpath Batch Calculation 271

278 Define the minimum distance that the tool must move before its feed rate is adjusted in Minimum change distance box. This is set to 25 mm or 1 inch by default, depending on whether you are working in imperial or metric units of measurement. Define the accuracy that is used when simulating the machining process in the Simulation resolution box. This must be equal to or less than the radius of the smallest tool in the list of calculated toolpaths selected for optimization. This is set to 3 mm or 0.06 inches by default, depending on whether you are working in imperial or metric units of measurement. The memory requirements for the current Optifeed simulation are shown below the Simulation resolution area. This is 0.02 Mb by default. Define a resolution that is appropriate for the piece and the toolpath. For example, roughing toolpaths do not require particularly high accuracy as they typically leave surface material that is removed later on in the machining process. It is suggested that you divide the corner radius of the smallest tool in the list by 5 and use the resulting value, except where this less than 0.5 mm in which case you should divide the tool diameter by 10 and use the result. Click on the OK button to close the dialog box and save the settings. 6. Click on the Start button in the Batch Calculate Toolpaths dialog box to optimize the selected toolpaths. If you do not have any calculated toolpaths selected, a message box is displayed warning that at least one calculated toolpath must be selected: Click on the OK button to close the message box. 272 Enhanced Toolpath Batch Calculation What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

279 If you have not yet defined the material setup or have deleted the setup previously defined in a toolpath, the following message box is displayed: Click on the OK button to close the message box. If the Simulation Resolution defined in the Optifeed Parameters dialog box is not less than or equal to the radius of the smallest tool used in all of the toolpaths listed on the Toolpaths page, the following message box is displayed: ArtCAM JewelSmith confirms the radius of the smallest tool in brackets at the end of the message. Click on the OK button to close the message box. A second message box is then displayed asking if you want to change the current Optifeed parameters: Click on the OK button to close the message box and display the Optifeed Parameters dialog box. You can then define the value for the smallest tool radius seen in the previous message box in the Simulation Resolution box. The following details are displayed in the Status window during the optimization process: The time and date on which the optimization process begins. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Toolpath Batch Calculation 273

280 The percentage by which the feed rate for each tool either accelerates or decelerates. The estimated time remaining until the optimization process is complete. The elapsed time for the complete optimization process. The memory requirements for the Optifeed simulation are also shown. The higher the resolution, the greater the memory requirements. If you cannot read all of a particular message in the Status area, you can use the scroll bar along the bottom and right edge of the area to review the text. A progress bar is shown in the status bar area indicating the time remaining until the optimization process is complete: If you want to cancel the optimization process at any time, click on the Stop button. 7. You can check the results of the optimization process as follows: Consider the colour changes in the toolpaths shown in the 3D View window. If the toolpath is green, this indicates that the feed rate has decelerated to a safer speed. If the toolpath is red, this indicates that the feed rate remains at its original speed. If the toolpath is orange, this indicates that the feed rate has accelerated up to twice its original speed. If the toolpath is yellow, this indicates that the feed rate has accelerated to more than twice its original speed. 274 Enhanced Toolpath Batch Calculation What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

281 Click to select any of the tools associated with an optimized toolpath listed on the Toolpaths Home page. The parameters of the selected toolpath are displayed beneath the Toolpath Simulation area. The optimized feed rates are shown in the Optifeed Min area and Optifeed Max area. You can compare these against the original feed rate of the selected tool shown in the Feed area. Click on the Toolpath Summary button in the Toolpath Operations area of the page to display the Toolpath Summary Information dialog box, and then compare the speed of the Machining Time against the Optifeed Time. Enhanced Toolpath Transform In previous versions of ArtCAM JewelSmith, you could only move and mirror a calculated toolpath. In ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008, the tools used to move a toolpath have been updated and you can now also: rotate a toolpath around a defined rotation centre move a toolpath to an absolute position toggle the display of all toolpath moves behind and below the surface of the composite relief, as seen in the 3D View window project a toolpath directly onto the surface of the composite relief; and move and rotate a 2D toolpath using its toolpath preview shown in the 2D View window. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Toolpath Transform 275

282 You cannot undo a transform on a toolpath made using any of the options available on the Toolpath Transform page. If you try to undo a transform made in this way, a message box warning that it cannot be done is displayed: Click on the OK button to close the message box. You can however undo a transform on a 2D toolpath, providing that it is made directly from the 2D View window using its toolpath preview. To transform a calculated toolpath: 1. Click on the Toolpaths tab to display the Toolpaths Home page. 2. Click on the Toolpath Transform button in the Toolpath Operations area to display the Toolpath Transform page. A list of all calculated toolpaths is displayed. You can also display the Toolpath Transform page if you right-click on a selected 2D toolpath preview to display its context menu, then click on the Transform Toolpath menu option. If there are no calculated toolpaths listed on the Toolpaths Home page, a message box warning that there must be at least one calculated toolpath available to transform is displayed: Click on the OK button to close the message box. 3. Select the calculated toolpath that you want to transform: Click on the name of the toolpath from those listed at the top of the page. Its name is emphasized in blue. 276 Enhanced Toolpath Transform What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

283 If the toolpath makes use of more than one tool, click on the toolpath name shown in bold text to transform all of its machining passes or an individual tool name if you want to transform a single machining pass. If you are transforming a 2D toolpath, providing that its Show in 2D option is selected you can also click on its 2D toolpath preview in the 2D View window. 4. The co-ordinates in the X and Y boxes in the Rotation Centre area show the current position of the transform origin. You can define the origin about which you want to transform the selected toolpath in either of the following ways: Click on any of the five radio buttons on the rectangle diagram to set the origin to one of five preset positions. The co-ordinates of the selected position are displayed in the X and Y boxes. Define the X and Y co-ordinates of the position that you want to set as the origin in the X and Y boxes. Click on the Apply button to set the new origin. A blue cross marks the origin in the 2D View window. If you have selected a 2D toolpath, you can rotate the toolpath by clicking and dragging on the rotation handle in the centre of the bounding box that surrounds the toolpath preview when selected in the 2D View window. Hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard to make a copy of the selected 2D toolpath when rotating it using the rotation handle in the centre of the bounding box that surrounds the toolpath preview shown in the 2D View window. 5. If you want to move the selected toolpath: Define the distance by which you want to move the selected toolpath in the Step box. If you have selected a 2D toolpath, you can move the toolpath by clicking and dragging on the bounding box that surrounds the toolpath preview when selected in the 2D View window. Release the mouse button to set the new position of the toolpath. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Toolpath Transform 277

284 Hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard to make a copy of the selected 2D toolpath when moving it using the bounding box that surrounds the toolpath preview shown in the 2D View window. Use the appropriate arrow(s) on the diagram in the Positioning area to move the selected toolpath along any of the three axes: The arrows are colour co-ordinated with the origin gnomen displayed in the 3D View window to make it easy to visualize exactly how you want to move the selected toolpath. Each click on the arrow moves the toolpath up along the Z- axis by the increment specified in the Step box. You cannot move any 2D toolpaths in the Z direction. If any part of the selected toolpath moves above the Safe Z level originally defined when calculating the toolpath, a message box is displayed asking if you want to continue: Click on the Yes button to move the selected toolpath along the Z-axis by the increment specified in the Step box, or click on the No button to cancel the transform move. Each click on the arrow moves the toolpath down along the Z-axis by the increment specified in the Step box. Each click on the arrow moves the toolpath up along the Y- axis by the increment specified in the Step box. Each click on the arrow moves the toolpath down along the Y-axis by the increment specified in the Step box. Each click on the arrow moves the toolpaths left along the X-axis by the increment specified in the Step box. 278 Enhanced Toolpath Transform What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

285 Each click on the arrow moves the toolpath right along the X-axis by the increment specified in the Step box. 6. If you want to rotate the selected toolpath: Define the angle by which you want to rotate the toolpath in the Angle box. Use either of the curved arrows to rotate the toolpath around its local origin: Each click on the arrow rotates the toolpath clockwise by the increment specified in the Angle box. Each click on the arrow rotates the toolpath anti-clockwise by the increment specified in the Angle box. 7. If you only want to view areas of the toolpath in the 3D View window within the boundary of the composite relief, make sure that the Clip Toolpaths option is selected. 8. If you want to position the toolpath according to an exact set of coordinates: Define the X, Y and Z co-ordinates of the position that you want to set as the origin in the X, Y and Z boxes. If you cannot see the Absolute Coordinates settings, click on the arrow icon to display the X, Y and Z boxes. Click on the arrow icon to hide the settings again. 9. If you want to mirror the toolpath: Click on the Mirror X button if you want to mirror the selected toolpath about the X value of the centre of its bounding box. Click on the Mirror Y button if you want to mirror the selected toolpath about the Y value of the centre of its bounding box. If you cannot see the Mirror settings, click on the arrow icon to display the Mirror X and Mirror Y buttons. Click on the arrow icon to hide the settings again. 10. You can adjust the selected toolpath relative to the composite relief in either of the following ways: What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Toolpath Transform 279

286 If you want adjust the selected toolpath by the distance between the tip of the tool and the surface of the composite relief, at the point where the tool would first make contact, select the Drop Tool option by clicking on its radio button. Any depth below the top of the material block is preserved, meaning that the tool may move below the surface of the composite relief. If you want to adjust the selected toolpath vertically by the difference between the highest point in the composite relief and the top of the material block, select the Project Tool option by clicking on its radio button. Where there is no material block defined, ArtCAM JewelSmith adjusts the toolpath by the absolute height of the composite relief; whether positive or negative. Click on the Project On Relief button to adjust the selected toolpath relative to the surface of the composite relief using your chosen method. 11. Click on the Close button to return to the Toolpaths Home page. 280 Enhanced Toolpath Transform What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008

287 Enhanced Toolpath Simulation You can now define the resolution of the toolpath simulation. using the new Custom option available in the Simulation Relief Resolution area of the Toolpath Simulation - Block Definition dialog box. What s New in ArtCAM JewelSmith 2008 Enhanced Toolpath Simulation 281

TOOLPATHS TRAINING GUIDE. Sample. Distribution. not for MILL-LESSON-4-TOOLPATHS DRILL AND CONTOUR

TOOLPATHS TRAINING GUIDE. Sample. Distribution. not for MILL-LESSON-4-TOOLPATHS DRILL AND CONTOUR TOOLPATHS TRAINING GUIDE MILL-LESSON-4-TOOLPATHS DRILL AND CONTOUR Mill-Lesson-4 Objectives You will generate a toolpath to machine the part on a CNC vertical milling machine. This lesson covers the following

More information

Feature-based CAM software for mills, multi-tasking lathes and wire EDM. Getting Started

Feature-based CAM software for mills, multi-tasking lathes and wire EDM.  Getting Started Feature-based CAM software for mills, multi-tasking lathes and wire EDM www.featurecam.com Getting Started FeatureCAM 2015 R3 Getting Started FeatureCAM Copyright 1995-2015 Delcam Ltd. All rights reserved.

More information

ArtCAM Pro. Tutorials. By Delcam plc. Issue: 7.0 Date: 24/03/04

ArtCAM Pro. Tutorials. By Delcam plc. Issue: 7.0 Date: 24/03/04 ArtCAM Pro Tutorials By Delcam plc Issue: 7.0 Date: 24/03/04 Disclaimer Delcam plc has no control over the use made of the software described in this manual and cannot accept responsibility for any loss

More information

What's New in VCarve Pro 8.5

What's New in VCarve Pro 8.5 What's New in VCarve Pro 8.5 A quick start guide for VCarve Pro upgraders Copyright Vectric Ltd. Document V.1.0 Contents CONTENTS... 2 OVERVIEW... 3 ENHANCED & EXTENDED DRAWING TOOLS... 4 NEW TOOLPATH

More information

Tutorial Tracing and Machining Images

Tutorial Tracing and Machining Images Getting Started With Tutorial Tracing and Machining Images VCarve Pro Disclaimer All CNC machines (routing, engraving, and milling) are potentially dangerous and because Vectric Ltd has no control over

More information

Adobe Photoshop Sh S.K. Sublania and Sh. Naresh Chand

Adobe Photoshop Sh S.K. Sublania and Sh. Naresh Chand Adobe Photoshop Sh S.K. Sublania and Sh. Naresh Chand Photoshop is the software for image processing. With this you can manipulate your pictures, either scanned or otherwise inserted to a great extant.

More information

PowerMILL 2016 Getting Started

PowerMILL 2016 Getting Started PowerMILL 2016 Getting Started Release issue 1 PowerMILL Copyright 1996-2015 Delcam Ltd. All rights reserved. Delcam Ltd has no control over the use made of the software described in this manual and cannot

More information

Autodesk Fusion 360 Training: The Future of Making Things Attendee Guide

Autodesk Fusion 360 Training: The Future of Making Things Attendee Guide Autodesk Fusion 360 Training: The Future of Making Things Attendee Guide Abstract After completing this workshop, you will have a basic understanding of editing 3D models using Autodesk Fusion 360 TM to

More information

ArtCAM Pro 5.5. Double click the ArtCAM Pro icon on the screen with the Left mouse button.

ArtCAM Pro 5.5. Double click the ArtCAM Pro icon on the screen with the Left mouse button. ArtCAM Pro 5.5 Introduction. ArtCAM Pro allows complex 3D reliefs to be created quickly and easily from 2D images. The 2D images can be scanned images, imported from other drawing packages or created within

More information

LinkMotion and CorelDraw 9, 10, 11, 12, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7 and X8:

LinkMotion and CorelDraw 9, 10, 11, 12, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7 and X8: LinkMotion and CorelDraw 9, 10, 11, 12, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7 and X8: After you install LinkMotion software and set up all settings launch CorelDraw software. Important notes: Solustan s LinkMotion driver

More information

PowerMILL. Getting Started

PowerMILL. Getting Started PowerMILL R2 Getting Started PowerMILL 2012 R2 Getting Started Release issue 1 PowerMILL Copyright 1996-2012 Delcam plc. All rights reserved. Delcam plc has no control over the use made of the software

More information

4 TRANSFORMING OBJECTS

4 TRANSFORMING OBJECTS 4 TRANSFORMING OBJECTS Lesson overview In this lesson, you ll learn how to do the following: Add, edit, rename, and reorder artboards in an existing document. Navigate artboards. Select individual objects,

More information

Virtual MODELA USER'S MANUAL

Virtual MODELA USER'S MANUAL Virtual MODELA USER'S MANUAL Virtual MODELA is a program that simulates the movement of the tool on the screen. Contents Contents Part 1 Introduction 1-1 System Requirements... 4 1-2 Overview of Virtual

More information

VCarve Pro. Vectric Ltd Unit 2B Dunstall Court Astwood Lane Feckenham B96 6QH UK.

VCarve Pro. Vectric Ltd Unit 2B Dunstall Court Astwood Lane Feckenham B96 6QH UK. What's New In VCarve Pro Disclaimer All CNC machines (routing, engraving, and milling) are potentially dangerous and because Vectric Ltd has no control over how the software described in this manual might

More information

Graphic Design & Digital Photography. Photoshop Basics: Working With Selection.

Graphic Design & Digital Photography. Photoshop Basics: Working With Selection. 1 Graphic Design & Digital Photography Photoshop Basics: Working With Selection. What You ll Learn: Make specific areas of an image active using selection tools, reposition a selection marquee, move and

More information

Introduction to SolidWorks Basics Materials Tech. Wood

Introduction to SolidWorks Basics Materials Tech. Wood Introduction to SolidWorks Basics Materials Tech. Wood Table of Contents Table of Contents... 1 Book End... 2 Introduction... 2 Learning Intentions... 2 Modelling the Base... 3 Modelling the Front... 10

More information

MASTERCAM DYNAMIC MILLING TUTORIAL. June 2018

MASTERCAM DYNAMIC MILLING TUTORIAL. June 2018 MASTERCAM DYNAMIC MILLING TUTORIAL June 2018 MASTERCAM DYNAMIC MILLING TUTORIAL June 2018 2018 CNC Software, Inc. All rights reserved. Software: Mastercam 2019 Terms of Use Use of this document is subject

More information

CHAPTER 1 COPYRIGHTED MATERIAL. Getting to Know AutoCAD. Opening a new drawing. Getting familiar with the AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT Graphics windows

CHAPTER 1 COPYRIGHTED MATERIAL. Getting to Know AutoCAD. Opening a new drawing. Getting familiar with the AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT Graphics windows CHAPTER 1 Getting to Know AutoCAD Opening a new drawing Getting familiar with the AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT Graphics windows Modifying the display Displaying and arranging toolbars COPYRIGHTED MATERIAL 2

More information

All textures produced with Texture Maker. Not Applicable. Beginner.

All textures produced with Texture Maker. Not Applicable. Beginner. Tutorial for Texture Maker 2.8 or above. Note:- Texture Maker is a texture creation tool by Tobias Reichert. For further product information please visit the official site at http://www.texturemaker.com

More information

Tetra4D Reviewer. Version 5.1. User Guide. Details on how to use Tetra4D Reviewer.

Tetra4D Reviewer. Version 5.1. User Guide. Details on how to use Tetra4D Reviewer. Tetra4D Reviewer Version 5.1 User Guide Details on how to use Tetra4D Reviewer. ii Contents Chapter 1: Work area... 7 Looking at the work area... 7 Toolbars and toolbar presets... 8 About toolbars and

More information

Table of Contents. Logos Imaging Application User s Manual Version Page 1

Table of Contents. Logos Imaging Application User s Manual Version Page 1 Table of Contents About... 4 System Requirements... 5 Uninstall Previous Versions... 5 Install LIA 6.0... 6 Install the Device Drivers... 13 Register... 14 Getting Help... 14 Technical Support... 14 Workspace

More information

LAB # 2 3D Modeling, Properties Commands & Attributes

LAB # 2 3D Modeling, Properties Commands & Attributes COMSATS Institute of Information Technology Electrical Engineering Department (Islamabad Campus) LAB # 2 3D Modeling, Properties Commands & Attributes Designed by Syed Muzahir Abbas 1 1. Overview of the

More information

1.1: Introduction to Fusion 360

1.1: Introduction to Fusion 360 .: Introduction to Fusion 360 Fusion 360 is a cloud- based CAD/CAM tool for collaborative product development. The tools in Fusion enable exploration and iteration on product ideas and collaboration within

More information

Fig. A. Fig. B. Fig. 1. Fig. 2. Fig. 3 Fig. 4

Fig. A. Fig. B. Fig. 1. Fig. 2. Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Create A Spinning Logo Tutorial. Bob Taylor 2009 To do this you will need two programs from Xara: Xara Xtreme (or Xtreme Pro) and Xara 3D They are available from: http://www.xara.com. Xtreme is available

More information

Tool Manager Getting Started Guide. April 2016

Tool Manager Getting Started Guide. April 2016 Tool Manager Getting Started Guide April 2016 Mastercam 2017 Tool Manager GSG TERMS OF USE Date: April 2016 Copyright 2016 CNC Software, Inc. All rights reserved. Software: Mastercam 2017 Use of this document

More information

Tutorial 1 Engraved Brass Plate R

Tutorial 1 Engraved Brass Plate R Getting Started With Tutorial 1 Engraved Brass Plate R4-090123 Table of Contents What is V-Carving?... 2 What the software allows you to do... 3 What file formats can be used?... 3 Getting Help... 3 Overview

More information

Sending image(s) to report Click Send Snapshot on any screen in Dolphin3D and choose the Send to Report option

Sending image(s) to report Click Send Snapshot on any screen in Dolphin3D and choose the Send to Report option Dolphin 3D Reports Sending image(s) to report Click Send Snapshot on any screen in Dolphin3D and choose the Send to Report option Creating a report step by step 1. Generate the desired images in Dolphin3D

More information

Roland Face Designer User Guide

Roland Face Designer User Guide Roland Face Designer User Guide Version: 1.001a Date: 22/11/04 Contents Tutorial 1 Overview...1 Roland Face Designer Tutorial...2 Step 1 - Preparation...2 Step 2 - Importing the Photo Image...3 Step 3

More information

ezimagex2 User s Guide Version 1.0

ezimagex2 User s Guide Version 1.0 ezimagex2 User s Guide Version 1.0 Copyright and Trademark Information The products described in this document are copyrighted works of AVEN, Inc. 2015 AVEN, Inc. 4595 Platt Rd Ann Arbor, MI 48108 All

More information

What's New in Aspire 4.5

What's New in Aspire 4.5 What's New in Aspire 4.5 A quick start guide for Aspire upgraders Vectric Ltd. Document V.1.0 Contents CONTENTS... 2 OVERVIEW... 3 NEW DRAWING TOOLS... 4 Vector Boundary... 5 ENHANCED & EXTENDED DRAWING

More information

TRAINING GUIDE MILL-LESSON-FBM-1 FBM MILL AND FBM DRILL

TRAINING GUIDE MILL-LESSON-FBM-1 FBM MILL AND FBM DRILL TRAINING GUIDE MILL-LESSON-FBM-1 FBM MILL AND FBM DRILL Mastercam Training Guide Objectives Previously in Mill-Lesson-6 and Mill-Lesson-7 geometry was created and machined using standard Mastercam methods.

More information

FactoryLink 7. Version 7.0. Client Builder Reference Manual

FactoryLink 7. Version 7.0. Client Builder Reference Manual FactoryLink 7 Version 7.0 Client Builder Reference Manual Copyright 2000 United States Data Corporation. All rights reserved. NOTICE: The information contained in this document (and other media provided

More information

9 ADVANCED LAYERING. Lesson overview

9 ADVANCED LAYERING. Lesson overview 9 ADVANCED LAYERING Lesson overview In this lesson, you ll learn how to do the following: Import a layer from another file. Clip a layer. Create and edit an adjustment layer. Use Vanishing Point 3D effects

More information

VisualPST 2.4. Visual object report editor for PowerSchool. Copyright Park Bench Software, LLC All Rights Reserved

VisualPST 2.4. Visual object report editor for PowerSchool. Copyright Park Bench Software, LLC All Rights Reserved VisualPST 2.4 Visual object report editor for PowerSchool Copyright 2004-2015 Park Bench Software, LLC All Rights Reserved www.parkbenchsoftware.com This software is not free - if you use it, you must

More information

Introduction to SolidWorks for Technology. No1: Childs Toy

Introduction to SolidWorks for Technology. No1: Childs Toy Introduction to SolidWorks for Technology No1: Childs Toy Table of Contents Table of Contents... 1 Introduction... 2 Part Modelling: Cab... 3 Part Modelling: Base... 6 Part Modelling: Wheel... 12 Assembly:

More information

ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR CS3

ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR CS3 ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR CS3 Chapter 2 Creating Text and Gradients Chapter 2 1 Creating type Create and Format Text Create text anywhere Select the Type Tool Click the artboard and start typing or click and drag

More information

3D Modeling and Design Glossary - Beginner

3D Modeling and Design Glossary - Beginner 3D Modeling and Design Glossary - Beginner Align: to place or arrange (things) in a straight line. To use the Align tool, select at least two objects by Shift left-clicking on them or by dragging a box

More information

Mastercam X9 for SOLIDWORKS

Mastercam X9 for SOLIDWORKS Chapter 21 CO2 Shell Car Mastercam X9 for SOLIDWORKS A. Enable Mastercam for SOLIDWORKS. Step 1. If necessary, turn on Mastercam for SOLIDWORKS, click the flyout of Options on the Standard toolbar and

More information

Océ Posterizer Pro Designer. POP into retail. User manual Application guide

Océ Posterizer Pro Designer. POP into retail. User manual Application guide - Océ Posterizer Pro Designer POP into retail o User manual Application guide Copyright copyright-2010 Océ All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced, copied, adapted, or transmitted in

More information

use selection tools, layers & masks in PhotoPlus X4 Faking it! Combine three source photos and add text to create a composite image or montage.

use selection tools, layers & masks in PhotoPlus X4 Faking it! Combine three source photos and add text to create a composite image or montage. How to use selection tools, layers & masks in PhotoPlus X4 Faking it! Combine three source photos and add text to create a composite image or montage. The example montage uses photographs of a famous building

More information

Getting Started with ShowcaseChapter1:

Getting Started with ShowcaseChapter1: Chapter 1 Getting Started with ShowcaseChapter1: In this chapter, you learn the purpose of Autodesk Showcase, about its interface, and how to import geometry and adjust imported geometry. Objectives After

More information

3 WORKING WITH SELECTIONS

3 WORKING WITH SELECTIONS 3 WORKING WITH SELECTIONS Lesson overview In this lesson, you ll learn how to do the following: Make specific areas of an image active using selection tools. Reposition a selection marquee. Move and duplicate

More information

Basic Concepts. Launching MultiAd Creator. To Create an Alias. file://c:\documents and Settings\Gary Horrie\Local Settings\Temp\~hh81F9.

Basic Concepts. Launching MultiAd Creator. To Create an Alias. file://c:\documents and Settings\Gary Horrie\Local Settings\Temp\~hh81F9. Page 1 of 71 This section describes several common tasks that you'll need to know in order to use Creator successfully. Examples include launching Creator and opening, saving and closing Creator documents.

More information

NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide

NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change for improvement without notice. We

More information

SNOWFLAKES PHOTO BORDER - PHOTOSHOP CS6 / CC

SNOWFLAKES PHOTO BORDER - PHOTOSHOP CS6 / CC Photo Effects: Snowflakes Photo Border (Photoshop CS6 / CC) SNOWFLAKES PHOTO BORDER - PHOTOSHOP CS6 / CC In this Photoshop tutorial, we ll learn how to create a simple and fun snowflakes photo border,

More information

Amazing Designs Apps Instruction Manual

Amazing Designs Apps Instruction Manual Amazing Designs Apps Instruction Manual Amazing Designs Apps is a new embroidery software system from Amazing Designs that contains multiple features, in different toolpacks that are activated separately.

More information

2D Design. Window. 3D Window. Toolpat h Operati ons. Navigation Homepage. Layer Managemen t. Component Manager. Modeling Tools

2D Design. Window. 3D Window. Toolpat h Operati ons. Navigation Homepage. Layer Managemen t. Component Manager. Modeling Tools Navigation Homepage Click on the region of the interface you are interested in to navigate to the relevant section of this manual. At the foot of each page is a Navigation Homepage link, click on this

More information

User Manual Version 1.1 January 2015

User Manual Version 1.1 January 2015 User Manual Version 1.1 January 2015 - 2 / 112 - V1.1 Variegator... 7 Variegator Features... 7 1. Variable elements... 7 2. Static elements... 7 3. Element Manipulation... 7 4. Document Formats... 7 5.

More information

Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.05

Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.05 Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.05 1. Installing Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.05 If you already have Adobe Acrobat Reader installed on your computer, please ensure that it is version 4.05 and that it is Adobe Acrobat

More information

Chapter 1. Getting to Know Illustrator

Chapter 1. Getting to Know Illustrator Chapter 1 Getting to Know Illustrator Exploring the Illustrator Workspace The arrangement of windows and panels that you see on your monitor is called the workspace. The Illustrator workspace features

More information

Stamina Software Pty Ltd. TRAINING MANUAL Viságe Reporter

Stamina Software Pty Ltd. TRAINING MANUAL Viságe Reporter Stamina Software Pty Ltd TRAINING MANUAL Viságe Reporter Version: 2 21 st January 2009 Contents Introduction...1 Assumed Knowledge...1 Pre Planning...1 Report Designer Location...2 Report Designer Screen

More information

Dr.Engrave USER'S MANUAL

Dr.Engrave USER'S MANUAL Dr.Engrave USER'S MANUAL This document is the operation manual for Dr. Engrave for Windows, a program for plate engraving. Contents Introduction... 4 Operating environment... 5 Overview of Dr.Engrave...

More information

OpenForms360 Validation User Guide Notable Solutions Inc.

OpenForms360 Validation User Guide Notable Solutions Inc. OpenForms360 Validation User Guide 2011 Notable Solutions Inc. 1 T A B L E O F C O N T EN T S Introduction...5 What is OpenForms360 Validation?... 5 Using OpenForms360 Validation... 5 Features at a glance...

More information

METABUILDER QUICK START GUIDE

METABUILDER QUICK START GUIDE METABUILDER QUICK START GUIDE Table of Contents... 1... 2 The Menu, Tool, Format and Status bar... 2 The Stencil- Properties- Task- and Canvas Pane... 3... 4 Creating, Saving and Loading a model.... 4

More information

Impress Guide Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Impress

Impress Guide Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Impress Impress Guide Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Impress This PDF is designed to be read onscreen, two pages at a time. If you want to print a copy, your PDF viewer should have an option for printing

More information

12 APPLYING EFFECTS. Lesson overview

12 APPLYING EFFECTS. Lesson overview 12 APPLYING EFFECTS Lesson overview In this lesson, you ll learn how to do the following: Use various effects like Pathfinder, Distort & Transform, Offset Path, and Drop Shadow effects. Use Warp effects

More information

Impress Guide. Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Impress

Impress Guide. Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Impress Impress Guide Chapter 11 Setting Up and Customizing Impress Copyright This document is Copyright 2007 2013 by its contributors as listed below. You may distribute it and/or modify it under the terms of

More information

4. Generating a Relief

4. Generating a Relief ArtCAM Pro 5.5 Relief. The 3D model created by ArtCAM Pro is called a Relief and is shown in the 3D View. The Relief is defined by a resolution in a similar way to a bitmap image. But, instead of each

More information

StickFont v2.12 User Manual. Copyright 2012 NCPlot Software LLC

StickFont v2.12 User Manual. Copyright 2012 NCPlot Software LLC StickFont v2.12 User Manual Copyright 2012 NCPlot Software LLC StickFont Manual Table of Contents Welcome... 1 Registering StickFont... 3 Getting Started... 5 Getting Started... 5 Adding text to your

More information

Mill Level 1 Training Tutorial

Mill Level 1 Training Tutorial To order more books: Call 1-800-529-5517 or Visit www.inhousesolutions.com or Contact your Mastercam dealer Mastercam X 5 Copyright: 1998-2010 In-House Solutions Inc. All rights reserved Software: Mastercam

More information

USER GUIDE MADCAP CAPTURE 7. Getting Started

USER GUIDE MADCAP CAPTURE 7. Getting Started USER GUIDE MADCAP CAPTURE 7 Getting Started Copyright 2018 MadCap Software. All rights reserved. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. The software described in this document

More information

Keynote 08 Basics Website:

Keynote 08 Basics Website: Website: http://etc.usf.edu/te/ Keynote is Apple's presentation application. Keynote is installed as part of the iwork suite, which also includes the word processing program Pages and the spreadsheet program

More information

Working with Plan Production ObjectsChapter1:

Working with Plan Production ObjectsChapter1: Chapter 1 Working with Plan Production ObjectsChapter1: The lessons in this chapter guide you through the processes of creating and working with plan production objects. Plan production objects include

More information

To familiarize of 3ds Max user interface and adapt a workflow based on preferences of navigating Autodesk 3D Max.

To familiarize of 3ds Max user interface and adapt a workflow based on preferences of navigating Autodesk 3D Max. Job No: 01 Duration: 8H Job Title: User interface overview Objective: To familiarize of 3ds Max user interface and adapt a workflow based on preferences of navigating Autodesk 3D Max. Students should be

More information

Chapter 1 Introducing Draw

Chapter 1 Introducing Draw Draw Guide Chapter 1 Introducing Draw Drawing Vector Graphics in LibreOffice Copyright This document is Copyright 2013 by its contributors as listed below. You may distribute it and/or modify it under

More information

PATHFINDER3D Help. Updated September 26, Page 1 of 40

PATHFINDER3D Help. Updated September 26, Page 1 of 40 PATHFINDER3D Help Updated September 26, 2012 Page 1 of 40 Contents Introduction... 4 Product Description... 4 How to use this document... 4 Terms... 4 Procedures... 5 Installing... 5 Configuring... 6 Licensing...

More information

AutoCAD 2009 User InterfaceChapter1:

AutoCAD 2009 User InterfaceChapter1: AutoCAD 2009 User InterfaceChapter1: Chapter 1 The AutoCAD 2009 interface has been enhanced to make AutoCAD even easier to use, while making as much screen space available as possible. In this chapter,

More information

Impress Guide. Chapter 1 Introducing Impress

Impress Guide. Chapter 1 Introducing Impress Impress Guide Chapter 1 Introducing Impress Copyright This document is Copyright 2005 2009 by its contributors as listed in the section titled Authors. You may distribute it and/or modify it under the

More information

DA-CAD User Manual Dürkopp Adler AG

DA-CAD User Manual Dürkopp Adler AG DA-CAD 5000 User Manual DA-CAD 5000 All rights reserved No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping,

More information

14. Using Illustrator CC with Other Adobe Applications

14. Using Illustrator CC with Other Adobe Applications 14. Using Illustrator CC with Other Adobe Applications Lesson overview In this lesson, you ll learn how to do the following: Place linked and embedded graphics in an Illustrator file. Place multiple images

More information

2 SELECTING AND ALIGNING

2 SELECTING AND ALIGNING 2 SELECTING AND ALIGNING Lesson overview In this lesson, you ll learn how to do the following: Differentiate between the various selection tools and employ different selection techniques. Recognize Smart

More information

MecSoft Corporation 18019, Sky Park Circle, Suite K-L Irvine, CA 92614, USA

MecSoft Corporation 18019, Sky Park Circle, Suite K-L Irvine, CA 92614, USA MecSoft Corporation 18019, Sky Park Circle, Suite K-L Irvine, CA 92614, USA PHONE: (949) 654-8163 FAX: (949) 654-8164 E-MAIL: sales@mecsoft.com www.mecsoft.com What s New In VisualCAM 1.0 & VisualMILL

More information

Designer Reference 1

Designer Reference 1 Designer Reference 1 Table of Contents USE OF THE DESIGNER...4 KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS...5 Shortcuts...5 Keyboard Hints...5 MENUS...7 File Menu...7 Edit Menu...8 Favorites Menu...9 Document Menu...10 Item Menu...12

More information

Learning the Pro/ENGINEER Interface

Learning the Pro/ENGINEER Interface 2 Learning the Pro/ENGINEER Interface This chapter introduces the Pro/ENGINEER interface tools: the menus, the dashboards, the selection tools and the viewing controls. As you go through this chapter,

More information

Autodesk Fusion 360: Introduction. Overview

Autodesk Fusion 360: Introduction. Overview Overview Fusion 360 is a cloud-based CAD/CAM tool for collaborative product development. The tools in Fusion enable exploration and iteration on product ideas and collaboration within a product development

More information

User Guide 701P Wide Format Solution Wide Format Scan Service

User Guide 701P Wide Format Solution Wide Format Scan Service User Guide 701P44865 6204 Wide Format Solution Wide Format Scan Service Xerox Corporation Global Knowledge & Language Services 800 Phillips Road Bldg. 845-17S Webster, NY 14580 Copyright 2006 Xerox Corporation.

More information

XnView Image Viewer. a ZOOMERS guide

XnView Image Viewer. a ZOOMERS guide XnView Image Viewer a ZOOMERS guide Introduction...2 Browser Mode... 5 Image View Mode...14 Printing... 22 Image Editing...26 Configuration... 34 Note that this guide is for XnView version 1.8. The current

More information

Release notes for: NCG CAM v Date: 12/01/2017

Release notes for: NCG CAM v Date: 12/01/2017 NCG CAM Solutions Ltd are pleased to release There are some new features, enhancements to existing features, and some problems fixed. Please note that NCG CAM v15.0 will not install on Window XP, or on

More information

VIMED JWEB Manual. Victorian Stroke Telemedicine. Version: 1.0. Created by: Grant Stephens. Page 1 of 17

VIMED JWEB Manual. Victorian Stroke Telemedicine. Version: 1.0. Created by: Grant Stephens. Page 1 of 17 VIMED JWEB Manual Victorian Stroke Telemedicine Version: 1.0 Created by: Grant Stephens Page 1 of 17 1 Table of Contents 1 Table of Contents... 2 2 What is JWEB?... 4 3 Accessing JWEB... 4 3.1 For Mac

More information

PowerPoint 2016 Building a Presentation

PowerPoint 2016 Building a Presentation PowerPoint 2016 Building a Presentation What is PowerPoint? PowerPoint is presentation software that helps users quickly and efficiently create dynamic, professional-looking presentations through the use

More information

User Guide DYMO Label TM v.8

User Guide DYMO Label TM v.8 User Guide DYMO Label TM v.8 Copyright Trademarks 2012-2015 Sanford, L.P. All rights reserved. Revised 9/6/2016. No part of this document or the software may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or

More information

VisualCAM 2018 for SOLIDWORKS-TURN Quick Start MecSoft Corporation

VisualCAM 2018 for SOLIDWORKS-TURN Quick Start MecSoft Corporation 2 Table of Contents Useful Tips 4 What's New 5 Videos & Guides 6 About this Guide 8 About... the TURN Module 8 Using this... Guide 8 Getting Ready 10 Running... VisualCAM for SOLIDWORKS 10 Machining...

More information

Numbers Basics Website:

Numbers Basics Website: Website: http://etc.usf.edu/te/ Numbers is Apple's new spreadsheet application. It is installed as part of the iwork suite, which also includes the word processing program Pages and the presentation program

More information

CNC Programming Simplified. EZ-Turn Tutorial.

CNC Programming Simplified. EZ-Turn Tutorial. CNC Programming Simplified EZ-Turn Tutorial www.ezcam.com Copyright Notice This manual describes software that contains published and unpublished works of authorship proprietary to EZCAM Solutions, Inc.

More information

Exercise Guide. Published: August MecSoft Corpotation

Exercise Guide. Published: August MecSoft Corpotation VisualCAD Exercise Guide Published: August 2018 MecSoft Corpotation Copyright 1998-2018 VisualCAD 2018 Exercise Guide by Mecsoft Corporation User Notes: Contents 2 Table of Contents About this Guide 4

More information

Contents. Introducing Clicker Paint 5. Getting Started 7. Using The Tools 10. Using Sticky Points 15. Free resources at LearningGrids.

Contents. Introducing Clicker Paint 5. Getting Started 7. Using The Tools 10. Using Sticky Points 15. Free resources at LearningGrids. ClickerPaintManualUS.indd 2-3 13/02/2007 13:20:28 Clicker Paint User Guide Contents Introducing Clicker Paint 5 Free resources at LearningGrids.com, 6 Installing Clicker Paint, 6 Getting Started 7 How

More information

Creating Interactive PDF Forms

Creating Interactive PDF Forms Creating Interactive PDF Forms Using Adobe Acrobat X Pro for the Mac University Information Technology Services Training, Outreach, Learning Technologies and Video Production Copyright 2012 KSU Department

More information

Table of Contents. Preface...iii. INTRODUCTION 1. Introduction to M ultimedia and Web Design 1. ILLUSTRATOR CS6 1. Introducing Illustrator CS6 17

Table of Contents. Preface...iii. INTRODUCTION 1. Introduction to M ultimedia and Web Design 1. ILLUSTRATOR CS6 1. Introducing Illustrator CS6 17 Table of Contents Preface...........iii INTRODUCTION 1. Introduction to M ultimedia and Web Design 1 Introduction 2 Exploring the Applications of Multimedia 2 Understanding Web Design 3 Exploring the Scope

More information

Customizing FlipCharts Promethean Module 2 (ActivInspire)

Customizing FlipCharts Promethean Module 2 (ActivInspire) Customizing FlipCharts Promethean Module 2 (ActivInspire) Section 1: Browsers The browsers (located on the left side of the flipchart) are menus for various functions. To view the browsers, click Main

More information

Working with PhotoVCarve files

Working with PhotoVCarve files Getting Started with Tutorial 4 Intermediate Level Working with PhotoVCarve files VCarve Pro Disclaimer All CNC machines (routing, engraving, and milling) are potentially dangerous and because Vectric

More information

Lesson 1: Creating T- Spline Forms. In Samples section of your Data Panel, browse to: Fusion 101 Training > 03 Sculpt > 03_Sculpting_Introduction.

Lesson 1: Creating T- Spline Forms. In Samples section of your Data Panel, browse to: Fusion 101 Training > 03 Sculpt > 03_Sculpting_Introduction. 3.1: Sculpting Sculpting in Fusion 360 allows for the intuitive freeform creation of organic solid bodies and surfaces by leveraging the T- Splines technology. In the Sculpt Workspace, you can rapidly

More information

Slides & Presentations

Slides & Presentations Section 2 Slides & Presentations ECDL Section 2 Slides & Presentations By the end of this section you should be able to: Understand and Use Different Views Understand Slide Show Basics Save, Close and

More information

Welcome to MicroStation

Welcome to MicroStation Welcome to MicroStation Module Overview This module will help a new user become familiar with the tools and features found in the MicroStation design environment. Module Prerequisites Fundamental knowledge

More information

StickFont Editor v1.01 User Manual. Copyright 2012 NCPlot Software LLC

StickFont Editor v1.01 User Manual. Copyright 2012 NCPlot Software LLC StickFont Editor v1.01 User Manual Copyright 2012 NCPlot Software LLC StickFont Editor Manual Table of Contents Welcome... 1 Registering StickFont Editor... 3 Getting Started... 5 Getting Started...

More information

2 Solutions Chapter 3. Chapter 3: Practice Example 1

2 Solutions Chapter 3. Chapter 3: Practice Example 1 1 Solutions This section includes the step by step solutions for the practice exercise for the following chapters and sections: Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 11: Rainbow Springs sample test Final

More information

KMnet Viewer. User Guide

KMnet Viewer. User Guide KMnet Viewer User Guide Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change for improvement without notice. We cannot be

More information

ILLUSTRATOR. Introduction to Adobe Illustrator. You will;

ILLUSTRATOR. Introduction to Adobe Illustrator. You will; ILLUSTRATOR You will; 1. Learn Basic Navigation. 2. Learn about Paths. 3. Learn about the Line Tools. 4. Learn about the Shape Tools. 5. Learn about Strokes and Fills. 6. Learn about Transformations. 7.

More information

SMART Meeting Pro 4.2 personal license USER S GUIDE

SMART Meeting Pro 4.2 personal license USER S GUIDE smarttech.com/docfeedback/170973 SMART Meeting Pro 4.2 personal license USER S GUIDE Product registration If you register your SMART product, we ll notify you of new features and software upgrades. Register

More information

Let s Make a Front Panel using FrontCAD

Let s Make a Front Panel using FrontCAD Let s Make a Front Panel using FrontCAD By Jim Patchell FrontCad is meant to be a simple, easy to use CAD program for creating front panel designs and artwork. It is a free, open source program, with the

More information

12 APPLYING EFFECTS. Lesson overview

12 APPLYING EFFECTS. Lesson overview 12 APPLYING EFFECTS Lesson overview In this lesson, you ll learn how to do the following: Use various effects, such as Pathfinder, Scribble, and Drop Shadow. Use Warp effects to distort type. Create three-dimensional

More information